Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Operator Components
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
OP 030 1
OP 032S 2
OP 010 3
OP 010S 4
OP 010C 5
OP 015A 9
Manual
15 TFT 10
Component PCU 20 11
Component PCU 50 12
Component PCU 70 13
Distributed Installation 14
Operator Component
PP 012 15
PP 031 MC 16
QWERTY Keyboard 17
Connection Conditions 25
Printing history
Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.
The status of each edition is shown by the code in the Remarks column.
A . . . . . New documentation.
B . . . . . Unrevised reprint with new order no.
C . . . . . Revised edition with new status.
If factual changes have been made on the page in relation to the same software
version, this is indicated by a new edition coding in the header on that page.
Trademarks
SIMATICr, SIMATIC HMIr, SIMATIC NETr, SIROTECr, SINUMERIKr and SIMODRIVEr are trademarks of
Siemens. Other product names used in this documentation may be trademarks which, if used by third par-
ties, could infringe the rights of their owners.
This publication was produced with Interleaf V7. We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to
the hardware and software described. Nonetheless, differences might
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely
contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders identical. The information contained in this document is, however,
will be liable for damages. All rights, including those created by patent reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the
grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. next edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement.
Siemens AG, 19942002. All rights reserved Subject to changes without prior notice
Hotline If you have queries regarding the control system, please contact the following
hotline:
Fax form: See the feedback page at the end of the document
Specified The SW versions specified in the documentation refer to the SINUMERIK 840D
SW version and SINUMERIK 810D control systems. The software versions are related to
each other, see Table 1.1.
Content of this The information contained in this manual explains how to install the operator
manual components for the 840D numerical controls and describes how to maintain and
service them.
Safety and The following safety and warning information is used in this document. The
warning concept symbols used and their meaning are explained below.
Danger
! Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury or in substantial property damage.
Warning
! Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury or in substantial property damage.
Caution
! Used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or in property da-
mage.
Caution
Used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.
Notice
Used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if not
avoided, may result in an undesirable result or state.
Other information The symbols used for other information are explained below.
!
Important
Important indicates an important or especially relevant item of information.
Note
Note refers to an important item of information about the product, handling of
the product or part of the documentation which is particularly relevant in the
current context.
Machine Manufacturer
This symbol appears in this documentation whenever the machine manufac-
turer can influence or modify the described functional behavior. Please observe
the information provided by the machine manufacturer.
Warnings and To safeguard your own personal safety as well as protect the product described
safety information and all connected equipment and machines against damage, please read and
observe the following warnings and safety information.
Warning
! Operational electrical equipment has parts and components which are at
hazardous voltage levels.
Warning
! S Repairs to equipment supplied by Siemens must always be carried out by
SIEMENS after-sales service personnel or by repair centers authorized
by SIEMENS. Parts or components must always be replaced by parts or
components specified in the spare parts list.
S Always disconnect the power supply before you open the unit.
S EMERGENCY STOP devices in compliance with EN 60204 IEC 204 (VDE
0113) must remain operative in all operating modes of the automation de-
vice. Resetting the EMERGENCY STOP device must not result in any un-
controlled or undefined system restart.
S Wherever faults in the automation device have the potential to cause sub-
stantial material damage or even human injury, i.e. they can present a dan-
ger, additional external precautions must be taken or devices provided
which will guarantee or enforce a safe operating state in the event of a fault
(e.g. through independent limit value switches, mech. interlocks, etc.).
Caution
! S Connecting and signal leads must be installed such that inductive and ca-
pacitive interference cannot impair automation functions.
!
Important
Handling ESDS boards:
S Boards may only be placed on conductive surfaces (desk with ESDS sur-
face, conductive ESDS foam rubber, ESDS packing bag, ESDS transport
containers).
S Boards may not be brought into contact with materials which can be char-
ged and are highly insulating, e.g. plastic foils, insulating desktops, articles
of clothing manufactured from man-made fibers.
Proper use The unit may be used only for the applications described in the catalog, and
only in combination with the equipment and components recommended and
approved by SIEMENS (e.g. SINUMERIK 840D/FM-NC).
J
Notes
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
1 Operator Panel Front OP 030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.1 Function blocks of operator panel front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.2 Control elements and interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.3 Dimension drawings and mounting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.4 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
2 Flat Slimline Operator Panel Front OP 032S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2.1 Overview of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2.1.1 US layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.2 Flat operator panel front OP 032S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
2.2.1 Function blocks of operator panel front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
2.2.2 Control elements and interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.2.3 Mounting instructions, dimension drawing and panel cutout . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.2.4 Using an ISA/PCI adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.2.5 Technical data for flat operator panel front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.3 CNC keyboard OP 032S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.3.1 Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.3.2 Connection of CNC keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.3.3 Mounting instructions, dimension drawing and panel cutout . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.3.4 Technical data for CNC keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.4 Machine control panel OP 032S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
2.4.1 Function blocks of machine control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
2.4.2 Control elements and interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
2.4.3 Dimension drawing and panel cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
2.4.4 Input and output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
2.4.5 Technical data for machine control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
3 Operator Panel Front OP 010 (Order No. 6FC5 203-0AF00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . 3-65
3.1 Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.2 Description of keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3.3.1 Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3.3.2 Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
3.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3.4.1 Assembling OP 010 and PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3.4.2 Mounting preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3.4.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
3.5 Soft key designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3.6 Spare parts/accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3.6.1 Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3.6.2 Spare part replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Position of control
elements SIEMENS SINUMERIK
7 8 9 -
4 5 6 +
1 2 3
0 .
Numerical key
group with
override and
input key
Cursor key
group
Soft keys (horizontal)
X101
X201
SIEMENS
1
2
3
X301
X303
Pin Name Type
1 DCD O
2 RxD I
3 TxD O
4 DTR I
5 M VO
6 DSR O
7 RTS I
8 CTS O
9 RI I
Jumpers closed
Pins 1 4 6
Pins 7 8
Signal names
TxD Transmit Data RS232C
RxD Receive Data RS232C
CTS Clear To Send
RTS Request To Send
DTR Data Terminal Ready
DSR Data Send Ready
RI Ring Indicator
DCD Data Carrier Detect
M Ground
Signal type
I Input
O Output
VO Voltage Output
X201
Pin Name Type
1
2
3 RS_OPI B
4 ORTSAS_OPI O
5 MEXT VO
6 P5EXT VO
7
8 XRS_OPI B
9 IRTSPG_OPI I
Signal names
RS_OPI Operator panel interface cable A
XRS_OPI Operator panel interface cable B
IRTSPG_OPI Input Request To Send, programming
device
ORTSAS_OPI Output Request To Send, interface module
MEXT External ground
P5EXT 5V external, isolated
Signal type
I Input
O Output
B Bidirectional
VO Voltage Output
X301
Pin Name Type
1 P24 VI
2 M24 VI
3 Shield
Signal names
P24 +24VDC supply voltage
M24 Ground
Shield Earth potential
Signal type
VI Voltage Input
Dimension 280
drawings
SIEMENS SINUMERIK
7 8 9
4 5 6 +
1 2 3
0 . 182
262.40.1 8.8
164.40.1
SIEMENS
1
2 82.20.1
3
8.8
131.20.1
60 4
Required clearance
40
203
Installing operator
Required clearance
panel front
280
22
234
47
Front
Panel cutout
164.40.1
156.40.5
82.20.1
1.5
80.5 1.0/100
0
5+0.5
Environmental conditions
Temperature ranges Installed/in operation Storage/transport
Limit values 0...40C 20 ... 60C
Service life 10,000h at 25C
Notes
Note
The slimline operator panel front OP 032S (OP 032 Small) and its components
can be used in conjunction with the following control systems:
SINUMERIK 840D
SINUMERIK 810D.
Operator The operator panel front OP 032S consists of the following components:
components S Slimline operator panel front OP 032S
S CNC keyboard (QWERTY) OP 032S
S Machine control panel (MCP) OP 032S.
310 801) 24
Power
supply
Slimline operator
panel front
330
OP 032S
MMC-CPU
3)
CNC keyboard
680 (QWERTY) ISA/PCI
175 OP 032S adapter
4)
Machine con-
175 trol panel 2)
(MCP)
OP 032S
Overview of
connections
24 V
Power
supply 0V
PE
MMC
NCU/CCU
CPU
X10/MF2
X4/MPI
24 V X20
0 V X10
PE
2.1.1 US layout
>
>
MACHINE MENU
SELECT
? & (
Q W E R T Y U I O P / 7 8 9
$ %
A S D F G H J K L , 4 5 6
*
! @ #
Z X C V B N M = [ ] 1 2 3
| < : ) >
TAB Ctrl Alt \ . ; + +/ 0
ALARM
RESET
HELP Alarm GROUP
CHANNEL
NEXT
WINDOW
PAGE
UP SELECT DEL
TOOL PAGE BACK
SHIFT PROGRAM End Insert Input
OFFSET DOWN SPACE
Note
The five additional keys (Help, Alarm, Program, Tool Offset, Space key) are not
supported by the standard block DB 19 of the PLC basic program. The user
program must be adapted accordingly for this purpose.
JOG REPOS
REF
POINT
SPINDLE 100% SPINDLE
[VAR] DEC. INC.
AUTO
X
Y Z
10
SINGLE RESET
4 5 6
BLOCK 100
S Mounting
W x H x D: 310x330x68mm
Add-on
components
S MMC CPUs (MMC 100, 100.2, 102, 103)
Note
For MMC 100 and 102, the following ribbon cable is required for connection
between MMC and power supply:
Position of control
elements
Display
Screen
control keys
PE
Power supply 0V
24V
Equipotential
bonding
X3 X4
X5
X6
Hard X10
MMC disk S1 X11
1 1
drive
S2
Installing MMC
module MMC 100, 1. Put the flat operator panel front on an appropriate surface as shown in
MMC 101/102 Fig. 2-7 (power supply module is on top).
2. Loosen the four Torx screws (M4) for attaching the MMC.
3. Suspend the MMC module from the four screws such that interfaces X4, X5
and X6 are facing to the right.
4. Push the complete module unit down until the bus connector snaps into
place.
5. Attach the MMC module by tightening the four Torx screws (max. tightening
torque 1.5Nm).
6. Connect the power supply to the MMC module using the ribbon cable.
4)
30
3)
2)
30
1)
1) 30 5)
2)
30
30 30
1) Necessary clearance
2) Measured from the upper edge of the MMC used
3) Permitted mounting position max. 60 degrees to the perpendicular
4) Recommended screw M4 with washer DIN 125
5) M5 grounding connector
1)
73
2)
55
27.5
9 15
0
19.7 19.7
307
302
280 7+ 0.5
2) 2) 2)
(4 times) 2)
0.5
Front panel cutout for flat
operator panel front 3)
2)
2) 2) 2)
22
0
5 15.8 0.5 1)
Front panel cutout
for CNC keyboard 3)
Fig. 2-10 Panel cutout for flat operator panel front (rear view)
Arrangements for If an ISA/PCI adapter is used, the following arrangements are possible:
use of an ISA/PCI
S Vertical, flat arrangement
adapter
S Desk-type arrangement.
flat arrangement
Power
supply Flat
operator
panel
front
Flat
operator
MMC panel
CPU front
Auxiliary
mounting plate
Same mount- (thickness =
ing surface 2mm)
ISA/PCI
adapter
CNC
CNC
keyboard
keyboard
Note: Note:
The ISA/PCI adapter is mounted on The ISA/PCI adapter is mounted
the rear panel of the CNC keyboard. on an auxiliary mounting plate.
Power
supply
Slimline
MMC operator
CPU panel front
ISA/PCI CNC
adapter keyboard
Mounting the Mounting the adapter on the rear panel of the CNC keyboard is only possible for
ISA/PCI adapter on a vertical, flat arrangement.
the rear panel of Sequence for mounting:
the CNC keyboard
1. Fasten the two brackets on the adapter (1) as shown in Fig. 2-13.
2. Loosen both screws (2) on the rear of the keyboard.
3. Position the adapter on the rear panel of the CNC keyboard.
4. Push the adapter in the direction of the slimline operator panel front until the
interface snaps into place on the top right-hand side.
5. Tighten the screws on the bottom of the adapter (2).
2
2
Mounting the When mounting the adapter on the desk-type arrangement, an auxiliary mount-
ISA/PCI adapter on ing plate is needed.
the auxiliary The mounting procedure is the same as on the rear panel of the CNC keyboard.
mounting plate
with precut
elongated holes Outline of flat operator panel front
42.8
1) 1)
113.8
1) 1)
141
2) 2)
Outline
(175 x 299.4, as
CNC keyboard)
111.9 101.4 0 103.1 113.6
1) Cutout for support 4 + 0.2
(see detail Y)
Detail Y
2) M4 for mounting the supports
(rivet-down nut)
1.3 x 45 27.3
Tolerance for dimensions: 0.5
12
Note: The fastening holes for the auxiliary mounting
plate are not shown in this drawing. 6.5
Fig. 2-14 Hole pattern and dimensions for the auxiliary mounting plate (rear view)
Mounting the When mounting the adapter on the desk-type arrangement, an auxiliary mount-
ISA/PCI adapter on ing plate is needed.
the auxiliary
mounting plate
with precut Outline of flat operator panel front
elongated holes
Front panel cutout
for flat operator panel front
(display module)
0
1) 1)
33.6
35.6
75.6
1)
Mounting brackets
1)
107.1 required
(not supplied by
Plate thickness = 2mm Siemens)
Outline
(175x299.4, as
CNC keyboard)
127 0 125.5
1) M4 for mounting the supports
(rivet-down nut) Note: The fastening holes for the aux-
iliary mounting plate are not shown in
Tolerance for dimensions: 0.5 this drawing.
Mounting bracket
Not to dimension) 20
Plate thickness = 1mm 11
Rivet nut M4 15
7
40
50 Hole 4.5
Fig. 2-15 Hole pattern and dimensions for the auxiliary mounting plate (rear view)
Note
The backlights should be switched off with a screen saver, when the lamp re-
mains off for more than 1 hour on an average.
The component with the smallest temperature range in the whole configuration
determines the temperature range of the whole system.
For the technical data of the MMC component used, please refer to the relevant
section Technical data of MMCxxx.
S 74 keys
S Layout similar to standard MFII keyboard
S Layout variants QWERTY and DIN available.
CNC keyboard
MMC-CPU
MFII interface
X10
X111
5)1.8Nm
1)
60 4)
1)
30
3)
30 50 6) 30 30
1)
2)
30
1) Necessary clearance
2) Measured from the upper edge of the ISA/PCI adapter
3) M5 grounding connector
4) Permitted mounting position max. 60 to the
perpendicular
5) Recommended screw M4 with washer DIN 125
Torque 1.8 Nm.
6) Required clearance for connector on ISA/PCI card
(depending on the connectors used)
13.8 1) 309.4
0 154.7 295.6 103
1)
175
169
162.5
144.4
53.4
12.5
6
0
24.8 19.6 77 24
1)
1) Dimensions of the
ISA/PCI adapter
M4 (6 times) 1)
158
153 7 (4 times)
145.5
0.5
7.5
0
5
Front panel cutout for installation from the rear: WxH = 301.4x153mm
Electrical data
Voltage max. 5.25V
Current, typical 18mA
Power loss max. 0.1W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width Height Depth
309.4mm 175mm 26mm
Ground Approx. 1.35 kg
Environmental conditions
Temperature ranges Limit values for use/operation:
Rear 0 ... 55C
Front 0 ... 45C
Limit values for storage: 20 ... 60C
Temperature variation within 1 minute max. 0.2K
Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5
within 1 minute max. 0.1%
Intake air without aggressive gases
Degree of protection to DIN Front IP 54, rear IP 00
40050
S Key caps (49 pcs., 48 with LED, can all be assembled variably)
S Feedrate override switch
S Possibility of installing optional customer-specific keys,
EMERGENCY STOP or second override switch
Key 11
LED 11
Supple-
mentary
control ele-
ments
(EMER-
GENCY
STOP or
Key 41 override
LED 41 switch)
Feedrate
override
switch
Key 50
Supplementary control elements LED 50
(6 keys, 1 keyswitch)
Fig. 2-21 Front view of machine control panel, overview and location of control elements
Control elements When supplied, the following control elements are provided on the machine
when supplied control panel:
S Key caps (49 pcs., 48 with LED, can all be assembled variably)
S Feed override switch.
Making the The openings for the supplementary control elements are embossed on the rear
openings with a side of the machine control panel.
drilling tool The diameter for the horizontal cutouts is 16.2 to 16.4mm.
The diameter for the EMERGENCY STOP button is 22.2 to 22.4mm.
Recommended: Drill the openings from the rear as follows:
S Clamp the machine control panel for machining on the rear (use suitable
drilling support).
S Switch the chip extractor on or cover the electrical parts to prevent chips
from falling on them.
Note
Before drilling the opening, metal chips must be removed from the drills.
S Use the appropriate drill to drill the desired openings (openings are cen-
tered).
Making the cutouts The cutouts should be knocked out only if the control elements used cover the
by knocking out broken edges on the front panel (no sharp broken edges).
1) 22.4
X20
130.7
125.6 DIP switch
8 1
Plug connector
1 2 3 4
3) 1x6 pin 3)
4)
56.5
57 X10 2 9
24/0V
40 9
34.5
10.4
16.3
2
0 0
2)
259.98 228.92 177.8 147.45 117.1 86.75 56.4 26.05 0
233 208.15
Fig. 2-22 Rear view of the machine control panel, dimensions of the machine control panel
Fig. 2-23 Rear view of the machine control panel, overview and location of interfaces
Note
The power supply interface should be wired in accordance with the labeling on
the module.
Note
The inputs/outputs implemented via X31 to X36 can be used as desired. The
function of the inputs/outputs is defined in the PLC user program.
The following inputs/outputs via X31 to X36 and their use are examples.
Assignments The following settings are possible with this DIP switch (8-fold):
Table 2-7 Assignments with switch S3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning:
ON Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud
OFF Baud rate: 187.5 kbaud
ON OFF 200 msecs transmission cycle time/2400msecs receipt
OFF ON monitoring
OFF OFF 100 msecs transmission cycle time/1200msecs receipt
monitoring
50 msecs transmission cycle time/600msecs receipt monitoring
ON ON ON ON Bus address: 15
ON ON ON OFF Bus address: 14
ON ON OFF ON Bus address: 13
ON ON OFF OFF Bus address: 12
ON OFF ON ON Bus address: 11
ON OFF ON OFF Bus address: 10
ON OFF OFF ON Bus address: 9
ON OFF OFF OFF Bus address: 8
OFF ON ON ON Bus address: 7
OFF ON ON OFF Bus address: 6
OFF ON OFF ON Bus address: 5
OFF ON OFF OFF Bus address: 4
OFF OFF ON ON Bus address: 3
OFF OFF ON OFF Bus address: 2
OFF OFF OFF ON Bus address: 1
OFF OFF OFF OFF Bus address: 0
ON MPI interface, customer operator panel front
OFF Serial hardware
Settings for the The PLC expects a message frame from the MCP at least every 500 msecs.
transmission The machine control panel sends a message frame to the PLC at cyclic inter-
cycle time vals when no key is pressed. This cycle time is set with S3 DIP switches 2 and
3. This enables the load on the PLC resulting from the machine control panel to
be adjusted.
Settings for The MCP receives message frames from the PLC at cyclic intervals and re-
receipt cycle time sponds to them at cyclic intervals. The receipt monitoring time is linked to the
transmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with S3 DIP
switches 2 and 3.
Bus address The bus address must be set to the value 6. Any other setting will be ignored by
the software.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning:
ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud
Transmission cycle time:
100 msecs
Bus address: 6
Ground
X31 X32
Pin 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Plug connector
5
175 169
162.5
125.6
48.9
49.4
19.5
12.5
6
0
2 24
0 13.8 154.7 260 309.4
295.6 42.4
1) 30.5
11.5
M4
158
153 7
145.5
1)
0.5
38
0
5
Input signals The control elements on the machine control panel are shown as input signals.
The start address n is set in the PLC user program by parameterization.
n+1 Key 43 Key 18 Key 19*) Key 20 X34 pin 2 Key 3 Key 2 Key 12
n+2 Key 47 Key 46 *) Key 4 X33 pin 1 Key 44 Key 34 Key 24 Key 14
Feed override
n+3 Key 32 X34 pin 1 X33 pin 2
E D C B A
n+4 Key 50 Key 48 Key 49 X32 pin 2 X32 pin 1 X31 pin 3 X31 pin 2 X31 pin 1
n+5 Key 33 X32 pin 3 Key 40 Key 39 Key 38 Key 30 Key 29 Key 28
Note
The following general Key operated > input is high
rule applies: Key not operated > input is low
Exception: The keys marked with *) respond in the opposite way.
Output signals The LEDs and lamps on the machine control unit are actuated by means of the
following outputs.
The initial address m is set in the PLC user program by parameterization.
m+3 Reserved
m+4 LED 50 LED 48 LED 49 X36 pin 2 X36 pin 1 X35 pin 3 X35 pin 2 X35 pin 1
m+5 LED 33 X36 pin 3 LED 40 LED 39 LED 38 LED 30 LED 29 LED 28
Programming For programming of individual keys and LEDs, we recommend the following
overview:
I n.2 n+1.1 n+1.2 n+2.5 n+7.7 n+7.6 n+7.5 n.6 n.5 n.4
O m.2 m+1.1 m+1.2 m+2.5 m+7.7 m+7.6 m+7.5 m.6 m.5 m.4
I n+0.1 n+1.0 n+6.2 n+2.0 n+7.4 n+7.3 n+7.2 n+1.6 n+1.5 n+1.4
O m+0.1 m+1.0 m+6.2 m+2.0 m+7.4 m+7.3 m+7.2 m+1.6 m+1.5 m+1.4
I n.0 n+6.1 n+6.0 n+2.1 n+7.1 n+7.0 n+6.7 n+5.0 n+5.1 n+5.2
O m.0 m+6.1 m+6.0 m+2.1 m+7.1 m+7.0 m+6.7 m+5.0 m+5.1 m+5.2
I n.3 n+3.7 n+5.7 n+2.2 n+6.6 n+6.5 n+6.4 n+5.3 n+5.4 n+5.5
O m.3 m+5.7 m+2.2 m+6.6 m+6.5 m+6.4 m+5.3 m+5.4 m+5.5
Fig. 2-26 Overview for programming of keys and LEDs (part of front view)
Function block for Function block FC 24 controls the input/output signals of the OP 032S machine
MCP control panel.
The following applies to the block:
Electrical data
Total current 24V
Current typ. 150mA
Max. power loss 3.6W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width Height Depth
309.4mm 175mm 41mm (behind
support plate)
24mm (in front of
support plate)
Ground Approx. 1.22kg
Environmental conditions
Temperature ranges Limit values for use/operation:
Rear 0 ... 55C
Front 0 ... 45C
Limit values for storage: 20 ... 60C
Temperature variation within 1 minute max. 0.2 K
Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5
within 1 minute max. 0.1%
Intake air No aggressive gases
Degree of protection to DIN Front IP 54, rear IP 00
40050
S 10.4 STN flat screen (color) with resolution of 640x480 pixels (VGA resolu-
tion)
S Membrane keyboard with alpha, numeric, cursor, control and hotkey key-
groups
S Soft keys:
1x eight horizontal and vertical rows of keys with soft key functions
Status LEDs: POWER TEMP *) Alpha key group Numerical key group
Softkeys Control
key group
Softkeys
Hotkey
group
Cursor
key group
USB
front
interface
*) When the TEMP LED responds, increased wear should be taken into account
Fig. 3-1 shows the front view of the OP 010 operator panel front.
The individual operator keygroups are described in Section 3.2.
S The Alpha key group contains the letters A, ..., Z on two levels arranged in
accordance with programming requirements.
S The numerical key group contains the digits 0 ... 9, the , /,=, + characters
and the decimal point.
Esc End
F11 Backspace
F12 Tab
Space (only intended for internal
keyboard switchover)
Cursor up Insert
3.3 Interfaces
3.3.1 Arrangement
Front USB front interface (see Fig. 3-1) for connection of external keyboard or mouse
on the front.
Note
Please note that, in respect of their EMC compatibility, many of the I/O devices
available from retail outlets are designed for office applications only.
For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certificate are recom-
mended.
IO USB PCU 50
cable K1 main board
OP 010
3.3.2 Assignment
Signal type
B: Bidirectional V: Voltage
3.4 Installation
When combining OP 010 and PCU 50, it is recommended to attach them prior
to installation.
Shipping
brace
Fastening
screws Fastening
screws
3. Release the four fastening screws of the hard disk drive brace
(see Fig. 3-3).
4. Put the OP 010 with the front on a horizontal, smooth surface.
Display
support plate 1)
3) 3) 3) 3)
Display
cable K2 2)
Cover plate for con-
nections 3) 3)
Height = 310
Keyboard controller
3) 3)
I/O USB 1) 3) 3)
cable K1 2) 3) 3)
5. Insert the PCU 50 horizontally with the straps of the already preassembled
mounting rails into the appropriate mounting slots (Fig. 3-4) of the OP 010.
6. Tilt off the PCU 50 to the left whereby the two straps act as hinges, prevent-
ing accidental loosening of the connection.
7. Swing open the hard disk drive braces.
8. Insert the cable connectors K1 and K2 of OP 010 through the opening in the
PCU 50 casing (see Fig. 3-2) and plug them into the corresponding mating
pieces (Fig. 3-5). The connector of the I/O USB cable K1 has locks which
can be felt to engage when the connector is inserted correctly.
9. Secure the connector of the display cable K2 (ribbon cable as of 09.2001)
using the clamp to prevent it from loosening (see Fig. 3-5).
10. Secure the display cable K2 to the board using a cable tie (see Fig. 3-5).
Fig. 3-5 PCU 50 Connection under the hard disk: connections to OP 010
11. Swing the hard disk fixing plate downwards and screw the 4 fixing screws in
place (0.8Nm).
12. Swing the PCU 50 to the limit position and fix it using the knurled screws
(torque 1.8Nm).
13. Unlock the shipping brace for the hard disk, otherwise the system will not
boot.
Note
If you want to insert or replace the soft key slide-in labels (are already installed
on delivery), you must do it before assembling OP 010 and PCU (see Fig. 3-4).
For instructions on how to label the replacement strips, see Section 3.5.
Thanks to the tension jacks fastening the OP 010, holes or screw holes are not
needed.
In addition, this type of fastening provides degree of protection IP 65 (however,
only in conjunction with a circulating seal and with the protecting cap of the USB
interface fitted).
Tension jacks
**)
450 +1
290 +1
112.5*
235 +0.2
0.2
Setscrews
56.25*
5
**)
**)
465 +0.2
0.2
*) dimensions for pressure points of the 1.5min to 6 max
tension jacks
**) holes for screw fastening Assembly panel Sealing area
Fig. 3-6 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010 operator panel front
3.4.3 Installation
1. Insert the assembled components OP 010 and PCU from the front into the
panel cutout.
2. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the six
tension jacks (see Fig. 3-6) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.40.5Nm).
Note
Alternatively, you can also fasten the operator panel front using screws:
To do so, break through the edge of the OP 010 at the four intended positions
(see Fig. 3-1 and 3-6).
In this case, however, you should note that the operator panel front will no lon-
ger comply with degree of protection IP65, but with IP54.
Clearance The clearance at the PCU rear side must be at least 10 mm to make sure that
sufficient ventilation is provided (see Fig. 3-7).
For more detailed information, please refer to Chapter Component PCU 50
and Chapter Heat Dissipation.
17.3
38.7
Clips
Required clearance
Mounting rail
297
10
20
Mounting rail
46.3
10
OP 010
Fig. 3-7 Attaching the PCU to the OP 010 operator panel front
Mounting position The permissible mounting positions depend on the conditions of the attached
PCU (see Chapter Component PCU50).
Making the labels To make the labels, DIN-A4 filmis available (Order No., see Section 3.6).
Procedure:
1. Letter the dull side of the film using a laser printer.
2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines.
3. Loosen the four fastening screws of the PCU and tilt the PCU off the opera-
tor panel front.
4. Slide the labels from the rear of the operator panel front into the intended
slots (see Fig. 3-4).
5. Swing the PCU back towards the operator panel front and fix it in place by
tightening the screws.
If the PCU and operator panel front are already dismantled, omit steps 3. and 5.
S DIN A4 film for slide-in user labels Order No. 6FC5 248-0AF07-0AA0
Soft key slide-in labels
Backlight with
backlight
inverter
LCD unit
Display holder
Fig. 3-8 Spare parts for the OP 010 operator panel front
Caution
! Spare parts may only be replaced by trained personnel (sensitive components
may be damaged due to static electricity)!
The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described in
the following, since it is simple and self-explanatory.
Operator panel When changing the front plate, the existing LCD unit and keyboard controller
front can be reused and are therefore removed and installed again after the front
panel has been changed.
Note
It is recommended to continue to use the keyboard controller, to make sure that
the programmed control parameters are not lost.
Procedure:
1. Put the OP 010 with the front side on a horizontal, soft surface and loosen
the 12 casing screws (see Fig. 3-4).
2. Remove the soft key slide-in labels and the cover plate (see Fig.3-4).
3. Remove the following connectors from the keyboard controller (see
Fig. 3-9): Backlight (base X14) and IO USB cable K1.
4. Lift off the display holder with the display.
In addition to the keyboard controller, the rear sides of mouse and USB in-
terface become visible.
USB interface
Connection X1
for IO USB cable K1
Membrane connec-
Connection X11 tor for connecting
the keyboard of the
operator panel front
Connection X4
for mouse
Connection X12
(reserved) Keyboard controller
5. After bending back the two clamping hooks, unplug the USB interface.
6. Loosen the three membrane connectors of the operator panel front key-
board from the sockets X7, X8 and X10 as follows:
Loosen the dark clamping frame of the socket by pressing it upward until
it locks in its upper, unlocked position (Fig. 3-10).
Carefully pull off the membrane connector upward.
Clamping frame
of socket
Fig. 3-10 Changing the operator panel front: Loosening a membrane connector
Note
When reattaching the membrane connectors of the USB and keyboard in-
terfaces, observe the following order: With the clamping frame lifted, care-
fully insert the connector into the socket; then press the clamping frame
down to lock it in place (see Fig. 3-11).
When tightening the screws, observe the relevant torques (see Section
Technical data).
Safety
Class of protection in conformity with VDE 0106 T1: 1982 (IEC 536)
Degree of protection Front IP 65/IP54 1) Rear IP 00
Safety regulations IEC in conformity with DIN VDE 0805/11.93
Approvals CE; FCC (Class 1 Div. II)
Electrical data (without PCU 50)
Power supply (via I/O Display Backlight in- Logic/USB
USB cable and display cable) verter
Voltage 5V +/ 5% 12V +/10% 5.2V +/ 2%
Current (typ./max. mA; 280/380 750/1000 350 2)/1000 3)
approx.)
Power consumption approx. 13W typical approx. 22W maximum
Mechanical data
Dimensions without PCU 50 Width 483mm Height 310mm Depth 110mm
Dimensions with PCU 50 in- Width 483mm Height 310mm Depth 120mm
cluding clearance for ventila-
tion(overall outer dimensions)
Weight approx. 5kg
Tension jack M3 screws: M4 screws:
Max. tightening torques
screws: 0.5Nm 0.8Nm 1.8Nm
Mechanical environmental Operation Transport
conditions (in packaging)
Vibration (whole system OP 1058Hz: 0.075mm 59Hz: 3.5mm
010 + PCU 50, tested to DIN 58200Hz: 9.8 m/secs2 9200Hz: 9.8m/secs2
IEC 6826)
Shock resistance (whole sys- 50 m/secs2, 30 msecs, 300 m/secs2, 6 msecs,
tem OP 010 + PCU 50, tested 18 shocks 18 shocks
to DIN IEC 68-2-29)
Climatic environmental conditions
Heat dissipation 4) by natural convection
Operation Storage/transport
0 ... 40C (front) 20 ... 60C
Temperature limit values
0 ... 55C (rear)
Tested to DIN EN 60068-2-2: 1994, DIN IEC 68-2-1,
DIN IEC 68-2-14
Limits for rel. humidity 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C
Tested to DIN IEC 68-2-3, DIN IEC 68-2-30, DIN IEC 68-2-56
Temperature change max. 10K/h
Condensation not permissible
Intake air No aggressive gases
Service life Backlight 50,000h
S Mechanical keys:
Eight horizontal soft keys
Eight vertical soft keys
Four control keys
Softkeys
Recall ETC key
Area switchover
Machine area
USB
front
interface Soft keys
*) When the TEMP LED responds, increased wear should be taken into account
<Shift> F10 F9
<Shift> F9 F10
4.2 Interfaces
4.2.1 Arrangement
Front USB front interface (see Fig. 4-1) for connection of external keyboard or mouse
on the front.
Note
Please note that, in respect of their EMC compatibility, many of the I/O devices
available from retail outlets are designed for office applications only.
For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certificate are recom-
mended.
Rear Two ribbon cables (Fig. 4-2) for connection of PCU on the rear:
S I/O USB cable K1: All signals that, in addition to the display interface are
used to connect operator panels.
S Display cable K2.
PCU 50
main board
PCU 50
IO USB
cable K1
Display OP 010S
cable K2
4.2.2 Assignment
4.3 Installation
When you are using a combination of OP 010S and PCU 50, it is advisable to
install the OP 010S in the assembly panel first and then mount the PCU 50 on
the OP 010S.
Thanks to the tension jacks fastening the OP 010S, holes or screw holes are
not needed.
In addition, this type of fastening affords degree of protection IP 54 (but only in
conjunction with a circular seal and plugged protective cap on the USB inter-
face).
Proceed as follows:
1. Insert the OP 010S in the panel cutout from the front.
2. Fix it in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks (see
Fig.4-3) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.40.5Nm).
112 0.5
112 0.5
56 1 Pressure points
for tension jacks
235 0.2
15 1
304 +1
285 +1
Elongated hole
292 0.2 7 for screw
fastening
Fig. 4-3 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010S operator panel front
310
Top
Casing 2) 1) 1) 1) 1) 2)
cover plate
IO USB
330
cable K1
Display
cable K2
1) 1)
1) 1)
2) 1) 1) 2)
1) Casing screws M3
2) Casing screws M4 for PCU mounting (on the side)
Fig. 4-4 Rear side of operator panel front with allocation of interfaces and mounting slots
1. Remove any mounting rails from the PCU 50 (see Chapter Component
PCU 50 Fig. 12-1 and Fig. 12-5).
2. Position the PCU 50 at approximate right angles to the OP 010S (see Fig.
4-2).
3. Insert the cable connectors K1 and K2 of the OP 010S into the correspond-
ing mating pieces behind the opening in the PCU 50 casing (see Fig. 4-2).
Make sure that the connectors lock in and the locks are closed.
4. Swing the PCU 50 onto the OP 010S.
5. Fix the PCU 50 to the OP 010S by means of the four M4 screws on the side
(torque 1.8Nm).
100
OP010S
0.5
PCU
0.3
297
330
100
Clearance for cables and ventilation
160
22 1
0.5
267
10
350.5
PCU
+3
120
0.3
310
Fig. 4-5 Attaching the PCU to the OP 010S operator panel front with clearances
Mounting position The permissible mounting positions depend on the conditions of the attached
PCU (see Chapter Component PCU 50).
LCD unit
Fig. 4-6 Spare parts for the OP 010S operator panel front
Caution
! Spare parts may only be replaced by trained personnel (sensitive components
may be damaged due to static electricity)!
The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described in
the following, since it is simple and self-explanatory.
Front plate When changing the front plate, the existing USB interface and the display
holder (with display, backlight inverter and keyboard controller) can be reused.
Procedure:
1. Put the OP 010S like the replacement front plate with the front on a horizon-
tal, soft surface.
2. Loosen the casing screws (see Fig. 4-4) and remove the casing cover plate.
The display holder with the keyboard controller (Fig. 4-7) will be visible un-
derneath and, in a cutout of the mounting plate, the rear side of the USB
interface (Fig. 4-9).
Display cable K2
Connection X11
IO USB cable K1 (reserved)
USB membrane line
3. Loosen the membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from
the sockets X7, X8 and X10 as follows:
Loosen the dark clamping frame of the socket by pressing it upward until
it locks in its upper, unlocked position (Fig. 4-8).
Carefully pull out the membrane end upwards.
Clamping frame
of socket
Fig. 4-8 Changing the operator panel front: Disconnecting a membrane connection
4. Loosen the membrane connection of the USB connection cable (Fig. 4-9) as
described under Point 3.
Display holder
USB interface
Fig. 4-9 USB interface viewed from the operator panel rear side
Note
When reattaching the membrane connections of the USB and keyboard
interfaces, observe the following order: With the clamping frame lifted, carefully
insert the end of the membrane into the socket; then press the clamping frame
down to lock it in place (see Fig. 4-10).
When tightening the screws, observe the relevant torques (see Section
Technical data).
Safety
Class of protection in conformity with VDE 0106 T1: 1982 (IEC 536)
Degree of protection Front IP 54 Rear IP 00
Safety regulations IEC in conformity with DIN VDE 0805/11.93
Approvals CE; FCC (Class 1 Div. II)
Electrical data (without PCU 50)
Power supply (via I/O Display Backlight in- Logic/USB
USB cable and display cable) verter
Voltage 5V +/ 5% 12V +/10% 5.2V +/ 2%
Current 420/600 900/1050 350 1)/1000 2)
(typ./max. mA; approx.)
Power consumption approx. 15W typical approx. 24W maximum
Mechanical data
Dimensions without PCU 50 Width 310mm Height 330mm Depth 45mm
Dimensions with PCU 50 and Width 310mm Height 330mm Depth 140mm
ventilation clearance(overall
outer dimensions)
Weight approx. 4kg
Tension jack M3 screws: M4 screws:
Max. tightening torques
screws: 0.5Nm 0.8Nm 1.8Nm
Mechanical Operation Transport
environmental conditions (in packaging)
Vibration (whole system OP 1058Hz: 0.075mm 59Hz: 3.5mm
010S + PCU 50, tested to DIN 58200Hz: 9.8m/secs2 9200Hz: 9.8m/secs2
IEC 6826)
Shock resistance (whole sys- 50 m/secs2, 30 msecs, 300 m/secs2, 6 msecs,
tem OP 010S + PCU 50, 18 shocks 18 shocks
tested to DIN IEC 68-2-29)
Climatic environmental conditions
Heat dissipation 3) by natural convection
Operation Storage/transport
0 ... 40C (front) 20 ... 60C
Temperature limit values
0 ... 55C (rear)
Tested to DIN EN 60068-2-2: 1994, DIN IEC 68-2-1,
DIN IEC 68-2-14
Limits for rel. humidity 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C
Tested to DIN IEC 68-2-3, DIN IEC 68-2-30, DIN IEC 68-2-56
Temperature change max. 10K/h
Condensation not permissible
Intake air without aggressive gases
Service life Backlight 50,000h
1) Typ. value with 100mA load (low power device) on the USB front connector.
2) Max. value with 500mA load (high power dev.) on the USB front connector.
3) See also Chapter Heat Dissipation.
J
S Soft keys:
1x eight horizontal row of keys with soft key functions
1x eight vertical row of keys with soft key functions
Alpha key
group
Softkeys
Numerical
key group
Cursor
key group
Control
key group
USB
front
Soft keys interface
*) When the TEMP LED responds, increased wear should be taken into account
Fig. 5-1 shows the front view of the OP 010C operator panel front.
The individual operator keygroups are described in Section 5.2.
S The Alpha key group contains the letters A, ..., Z and the blank.
S The numerical key group contains the digits 0 ... 9, the character and the
decimal point.
Esc End
F11 Backspace
F12 Tab
Space (only intended for internal
keyboard switchover)
Cursor up Insert
OFFSET
Alarm
Reserved Reserved
PROGRAM
Reserved Program
MANAGER Reserved
Tool
CUSTOMER
Reserved Offset Reserved
5.3 Interfaces
5.3.1 Arrangement
Front The USB front interface (see Fig.5-1) for connecting an external keyboard or
mouse is to be found on the front.
Note
Please note that, in respect of their EMC compatibility, many of the I/O devices
available from retail outlets are designed for office applications only.
For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certificate are recom-
mended.
PCU 50
main board
PCU 50
IO USB
cable K1
Display OP 010C
cable K2
Keyboard
controller
Interface
X11
(reserved)
Interface
X12
(reserved)
5.3.2 Assignment
Signal type
B: Bidirectional V: Voltage
5.4 Installation
When combining OP 010C and PCU 50, it is recommended to install them in an
assembly panel prior to installation.
Width = 483
Top
1) 1)
Display
support plate
Height = 310
Cover plate for
connections
Keyboard control-
ler
Display
cable K2 2)
I/O USB 1)
1)
cable K1 2)
Thanks to the tension jacks fastening the OP 010C, holes or screw holes are
not needed.
Tension jacks
**)
450 +1
290 +1
112.5*
235 +0.2
0.2
Setscrews
56.25*
5
**)
Front
**)
465 +0.2
0.2
1.5 min to 6 max
*) dimensions for pressure points
of the tension jacks
**) holes for screw fastening Assembly panel Sealing area (front)
Fig. 5-5 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010C operator panel front
5.4.3 Installation
1. Insert the assembled components OP 010C and PCU from the front into the
panel cutout.
2. Locate the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the
six tension jacks (see Fig.5-5) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 ...
0.5Nm).
Note
Alternatively, you can also fasten the operator panel front using screws:
To do so, break through the edge of the OP 010C at the four intended positions
(see Fig. 5-1 and 5-5).
Clearance The clearance on the PCU rear should amount to a minimum of 10mm to make
sure that sufficient ventilation is provided (see Fig.5-6).
For more detailed information, please refer to Chapter Component PCU 50
and Chapter Heat Dissipation.
17.3
38.7
Clips
Mounting rail
for ventilation
333
297
10
35.8
100+3
20
Mounting rail
46.3
10
OP 010C
Fig. 5-6 Attaching the PCU to the OP 010C operator panel front (viewed from above)
Mounting position The permissible mounting positions depend on the conditions of the attached
PCU (see Chapter Component PCU50).
Fig. 5-7 Spare parts for the OP 010C operator panel front
Safety
Class of protection in conformity with VDE 0106 T1: 1982 (IEC 536)
Degree of protection Front IP 54 Rear IP 00
Safety regulations IEC in conformity with DIN VDE 0805/11.93
Approvals CE; FCC (Class 1 Div. II)
Electrical data (without PCU 50)
Power supply (via I/O Display Backlight in- Logic/USB
USB cable and display cable) verter
Voltage 5V +/ 5% 12V +/10% 5.2V +/ 2%
Current 280/380 750/1000 350 1)/1000 2)/
(typ. /max. mA; approx.) 1200 3)
Power consumption approx. 13Wtypical approx. 22Wmaximum
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width 483mm Height 310mm Depth 110mm
(overall dimensions)
Weight approx. 5kg
Tension jack M3 screws: M4 screws:
Max. tightening torques screws: 0.8Nm 1.8Nm
0.5Nm
Mechanical Operation Transport
environmental conditions (in packaging)
Vibration (whole system OP 1058Hz: 0.075mm 59Hz: 3.5mm
010C + PCU 50, tested to DIN 58200Hz: 9.8 m/secs2 9200Hz: 9.8 m/secs2
IEC 6826)
Shock resistance (whole sys- 50 m/secs2, 30 msecs, 300 m/secs2, 6 msecs,
tem OP 010C + PCU 50, 18 shocks 18 shocks
tested to DIN IEC 68-2-29)
Climatic environmental conditions
Heat dissipation 4) by natural convection
Operation Storage/transport
0 ... 40C (front) 20 ... 60C
Temperature limit values
0 ... 55C (rear)
Tested to DIN EN 60068-2-2: 1994, DIN IEC 68-2-1,
DIN IEC 68-2-14
Limits for rel. humidity 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C
Tested to DIN IEC 68-2-3, DIN IEC 68-2-30, DIN IEC 68-2-56
Temperature change max. 10K/h
Condensation not permissible
Intake air without aggressive gases
Service life Backlight 50,000h
Notes
S Integrated mouse
S Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature
S Front-mounted USB interface
S Degree of protection IP65
S Attachment: clamps at rear
S Can be combined with the component PCU 50
S External floppy disk drive can be connected.
Numerical
key group
Cursor
key group
Control
key group
USB
front
Soft keys interface
*) When the TEMP LED responds, increased wear should be taken into account
Fig. 6-1 shows the front view of the OP 012 operator panel front.
The individual operator keygroups are described in Section 6.2.
S The ALPHA key group contains the letters A, ..., Z and the blank.
S The numerical key group contains the digits 0 ... 9, the character and the
decimal point.
Esc End
F11 Backspace
F12 Tab
Space (only intended for internal
keyboard switchover)
Cursor up Insert
6.3 Interfaces
6.3.1 Arrangement
Front USB front interface (see Fig. 6-1) for connection of external keyboard or mouse
on the front.
Note
Please note that, in respect of their EMC compatibility, many of the I/O devices
available from retail outlets are designed for office applications only.
For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certificate are recom-
mended.
S Interface X11, normally hidden under the cover plate (Fig. 6-4):
Signals from the 16 direct control keys vertical soft keys.
PCU 50
PCU 50 main board
Cable clamp
for connection
of direct control
key submodule
Keyboard
controller
IO USB
cable K1
Direct control
key interface
X11
Interface
X12 (reserved)
OP 012
6.3.2 Assignment
Signal type
B: Bidirectional V: Voltage
X11: 2x8 vertical The control states of the vertical direct control keys can be picked up here with-
direct control keys out firmware. These signals can be evaluated in the direct control key submo-
dule and in pushbutton operator panel fronts (e.g. PP031MC) with opto-iso-
lated inputs.
Connector to DIN 41651 plug connector, cable length max. 0.5m.
DT1 DT9
DT2 DT10
DT3 DT11
DT4 DT12
DT5 DT13
DT6 DT14
DT7 DT15
DT8 DT16
6.4 Installation
When using OP 012 and PCU 50 and also possibly a direct control key submo-
dule in combination (see Subsection 6.4.2), it is recommended to install them in
an assembly panel before final installation.
Width = 483
Top
Display 3) 3) 3) 1) 3)
1) 4) 4)
support plate
Height = 310
Cable
clamp 3) 3)
Display 4)
cable K2 2)
1)
3) 1) 4)
3) 3) 3)
I/O USB
cable K1 2)
1) Mounting slots for PCU straps 2) Cables shown folded 3) Casing screws
4) Slots for soft key labeling strips
Brief description The task of the direct control key submodule is to directly transfer the operating
signals for the two rows of keys on the side of the OP 012 (see Fig. 6-3) to SI-
MATIC without diversion through intermediate firmware.
The OP 012 outputs the signals from the two rows of keys on the side on its X11
terminal (see Fig. 6-2).
The direct control key submodule converts the key signals to PROFIBUS DP
protocol by means of the ASIC LSPM2 (PROFIBUS DIN 19245 Part 1, 12
Mbaud).
Power is supplied from the OP 012 PROFIBUS is completely isolated from the
direct control key submodule/OP 012 by means of an opto-coupler and DC/DC
converter.
The direct control key submodule operates as a slave on PROFIBUS. The ad-
dress can be set between 1 and 99 using a rotary switch. Two bytes of data are
transferred.
In SIMATIC, the keys are handled as if they were 16 ordinary digital inputs.
Assembly The direct control key submodule is installed to one side of the PCU50 on the
OP 012 and connected to the keyboard controller via a short ribbon cable.
1. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-head
screws at the four corners and lifting off the PCU.
2. Remove the ribbon cable clamp alongside the keyboard controller cover
(see Fig. 6-4), by inserting a pointed tool in each of the two slits and loosen-
ing the fixing cams by levering in the direction shown (see Fig. 6-5).
OP 012
Tilting motion of
tool
Rubber rim
Cable
clamp
4. Remove the rubber rim from the edge of the housing cutout (for fixing a
pushbutton panel ribbon cable) (see Fig. 6-5).
5. Insert the end of the ribbon cable supplied with the direct control key submo-
dule that is not rubber coated through the slit of the supplied cover into the
X11 socket of the keyboard controller (see Figures 6-2 and 6-6).
OP 012
Fig. 6-6 Installation of the direct control key submodule on the OP 012
6. Screw down the new cover tightly using the supplied screws.
7. Install the PCU as described in Subsection 6.4.1, Step 2. onwards.
8. Set the PROFIBUS address 01 to 99 on the coding switches of the direct
control key submodule (see Fig. 6-7; upper/lower coding switch:
Single/Block of ten).
Coding switch
LEDs
Connection for
cable from OP 012
(not visible)
Fig. 6-7 Direct control key submodule complete with coding switches and LEDs
PCU 50
Cover plate
Fastening
screws
Fig. 6-8 Installation of the direct control key submodule on the OP 012
9. Connect the ribbon cable to the direct control key submodule (in Fig. 6-8 out
of view on the rear).
10. Screw the direct control key submodule firmly to the cover using the knurled
screws on the side (see Fig. 6-8).
Figure 6-9 shows the completely assembled unit comprising OP 012, PCU 50
and direct control key submodule:
PCU 50
PROFIBUS
connection
OP 012
11. Insert the PROFIBUS plug (with straight outgoing cable) into the socket of
the direct control key submodule (see Fig. 6-9).
When the direct control key submodule is disconnected from PROFIBUS (or in
the event of other faults), the bus error LED is lit (see Fig. 6-7).
The direct control key submodule must be removed first on deinstallation of the
PCU.
Thanks to the tension jacks fastening the OP 012, holes or screw holes are not
needed.
In addition, this type of fastening provides degree of protection IP 65 (however,
only in conjunction with a circulating seal and with the sealing cap of the USB
interface fitted).
Tension jacks
**)
450 +1
290 +1
112.5*
235 +0.2
0.2
Setscrews
56.25*
5
**)
**)
465 +0.2
0.2
*) dimensions for pressure points 1.5 min to 6 max
of the tension jacks
**) holes for screw fastening Assembly panel Sealing area
Fig. 6-10 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 012 operator panel front
6.4.4 Installation
1. Insert the preassembled OP 012 components (complete with any direct con-
trol key submodule; see Subsection 6.4.2) and the PCU into the panel cut-
out from the front.
2. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the six
tension jacks (see Fig. 6-10) by tightening the setscrews (torque
0.40.5Nm).
Note
Alternatively, you can also fasten the operator panel front using screws:
To do so, break through the edge of the OP 012 at the four intended positions
(see Fig. 6-1 and 6-10).
In this case, however, you should note that the operator panel front will no lon-
ger comply with degree of protection IP65, but with IP54.
17.3
38.7
Clips
Mounting rail
for ventilation
333
297
10
20
Mounting rail
46.3
10
OP 012
Fig. 6-11 Attaching the PCU to the OP 012 operator panel front (viewed from above)
Mounting position The permissible mounting positions depend on the conditions of the attached
PCU (see Chapter Component PCU50).
Making the labels To make the labels, DIN-A4 filmis available (Order No., see Section 6.6).
Procedure:
1. Letter the dull side of the film using a laser printer.
2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines.
3. Loosen the four fastening screws of the PCU and tilt the PCU off the opera-
tor panel.
4. Slide the labels from the rear of the operator panel into the intended slots
(see Fig. 6-4).
5. Swing the PCU back towards the operator panel front and fix it in place by
tightening the screws.
If the PCU and operator panel front are already dismantled, omit steps 3. and 5.
S DIN A4 film for slide-in user labels Order No. 6FC5 248-0AF08-0AA0
Soft key slide-in labels
Backlight with
backlight
inverter
LCD unit
Display holder
Keyboard controller
Fig. 6-12 Spare parts for the OP 012 operator panel front
Caution
! Spare parts may only be replaced by trained personnel (sensitive components
may be damaged due to static electricity)!
The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described in
the following, since it is simple and self-explanatory.
Operator panel When changing the front plate, the existing mouse, LCD unit and keyboard con-
front/mouse troller can be reused and are therefore removed and installed again after the
front panel has been changed. The following description therefore applies both
to the operator panel front and for the mouse.
Note
It is recommended to continue to use the keyboard controller, to make sure that
the programmed control parameters are not lost.
Procedure:
1. Put the OP 012 with the front side on a horizontal, soft surface and loosen
the 12 casing screws (see Fig. 6-4).
2. Remove the soft key slide-in labels and the cover plate (see Fig. 6-4).
3. Remove the following connectors from the keyboard controller (see
Fig. 6-13): Backlight (base X14) and IO USB cable K1.
4. Lift off the display holder with the display.
In addition to the keyboard controller, the rear sides of mouse and USB in-
terface become visible.
USB interface
Connection X1 Keyboard controller
Mouse for IO USB cable K1
Connection X11
Membrane connector
for connecting the key-
Connection X4 board of the
for mouse operator panel front
Connection X12
(reserved)
5. After bending back the two clamping hooks, unplug the USB interface.
6. Loosen the three membrane connectors of the operator panel front key-
board from the sockets X7, X8 and X10 as follows:
Loosen the dark clamping frame of the socket by pressing it upward until
it locks in its upper, unlocked position (Fig. 6-14).
Carefully pull off the membrane connector upward.
Clamping frame
of socket
Fig. 6-14 Changing the operator panel front: Loosening a membrane connector
Note
When reattaching the membrane connectors of the USB and keyboard in-
terfaces, observe the following order: With the clamping frame lifted, care-
fully insert the connector into the socket; then press the clamping frame
down to lock it in place (see Fig. 6-15).
When tightening the screws, observe the relevant torques (see Section
Technical data).
Notes
Note
The touch panel TP 012 can be used in conjunction with customerspecific
HMI software.
Status LEDs: POWER TEMP (If lit, panel is subject to greater wear)
7.2 Interfaces
7.2.1 Arrangement
Front USB interface (Version 1.2) (see Fig. 7-1) allowing the following devices to be
connected on the front:
Note
Please note that, in respect of their EMC compatibility, many of the I/O devices
available from retail outlets are designed for office applications only.
For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certificate are recom-
mended.
Rear Two ribbon cables (Fig. 7-2) for connection of PCU on the rear:
PCU 50
IO USB
cable K1
Display cable K2
TP 012
7.2.2 Assignment
Signal type
B: Bidirectional V: Voltage
7.3 Installation
With centralized installation, the operator unit (TP 012) and the processing unit
(PCU 50) are connected to each other using the piggyback method. It is advis-
able to connect the units prior to installation in an assembly panel.
Width = 400
Top
2)
1) 1)
1) Mounting slots for Test label
PCU straps 2)
2) Casing screws
2) Display
Height = 310
cable K2
Nameplate
1)
2)
IO USB
cable K1 1)
Thanks to the tension jacks fastening the TP 012, holes or screw holes are not
needed.
In addition, this type of fastening provides degree of protection IP 65 (however,
only in conjunction with a circulating seal and with the sealing cap of the USB
interface fitted).
1.5mm to 6mm
A2 1
112 0.5 S1 1 S2 1 112 0.5
56 1
Rz 120
L1 +1
S1 1 S1 1
Fig. 7-4 Dimension sheet for installing the TP 012 operator unit
7.3.3 Installation
1. Insert the assembled components TP 012 and PCU 50 from the front into
the panel cutout.
2. Locate the touch panel in the panel cutout from the rear using the six ten-
sion jacks (see Fig. 7-4) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 ... 0.5Nm).
Clearance The clearance at the PCU rear side must be at least 10mm to make sure that
sufficient ventilation is provided (see Fig. 7-5).
For more detailed information, please refer to Chapter Component PCU 50
and Chapter Heat Dissipation.
17.4
50.1
Mounting bracket
353
297
10
Mounting bracket
55.9
36
28.6 33
10
313.6 57.8
TP 012
Fig. 7-5 Attaching the PCU to the TP 012 touch panel (viewed from above)
Mounting position The permissible mounting positions depend on the conditions of the attached
PCU (see Chapter Component PCU 50).
S SINUMERIK operator panel front without LCD unit for SINUMERIK TP 012
(front panel + touchscreen) Order No. 6FC5 248-0AF16-0AA0
Note
A sealing cap for the USB connection is factory-fitted on all initial orders.
Housing
Display
Touchscreen *)
Keyboard controller
Backlight inverter
for backlight
Display holder
Caution
! Spare parts may only be replaced by trained personnel (sensitive components
may be damaged due to static electricity)!
The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described in
the following, since it is simple and self-explanatory.
Front panel If the front panel only is to be replaced, the display, touch controller, USB mod-
ule and keyboard controller can be reused. These components are therefore
detached and then reattached following replacement of the front panel.
Note
It is recommended to continue to use the keyboard controller, to make sure that
the programmed control parameters are not lost.
Procedure:
1. Put the TP 012 with the front side on a horizontal, soft surface and loosen
the 12 casing screws (see Fig. 7-3).
2. Unplug the following connectors (see Fig. 7-7):
from keyboard controller:
Backlight (base X14), IO USB cable K1, membrane connector and con-
nection to USB module
Connection from touch controller to touchscreen
3. Remove the screws from the display holder.
4. Lift off the display holder with the display.
5. After bending back the two clamping hooks, unplug the USB interface.
6. Install these components in the new front panel in reverse order.
Note
When reattaching the membrane connector of the USB interface, observe
the following order: With the clamping frame lifted, carefully insert the con-
nector into the socket; then press the clamping frame down to lock it in
place (see Spare part replacement for OP 012).
When tightening the screws, observe the relevant torques (see Section
Technical data).
Display holder
IO USB cable K1
Base X14
Backlight
Membrane connector
Touch controller
USB module
Keyboard controller
Safety
Class of protection in conformity with VDE 0106 T1: 1982 (IEC 536)
Degree of protection Front IP 65 Rear IP 00
Safety regulations IEC in conformity with DIN VDE 0805/11.93
Approvals CE; FCC (Class 1 Div. II)
Electrical data (without PCU 50)
Power supply (via I/O Touchscreen Backlight in- Logic/USB
USB cable and display cable) verter
Voltage 5V +/ 5% 12V +/10% 5.2V +/ 2%
Current (typ./max. in mA) 280/380 750/1000 350 1)/1000 2)
Power consumption approx. 13W typical approx. 21W maximum
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width 483mm Height 310mm Depth 47mm
(overall dimensions)
Weight approx. 4.8kg
Tension jack M3 screws: M4 screws:
Max. tightening torques screws: 0.8Nm 1.8Nm
0.5Nm
Mechanical Operation Transport
environmental conditions (in packaging)
Vibration (whole system 1058Hz: 0.075mm 59Hz: 3.5mm
TP 012 + PCU 50, tested to 58200Hz: 9.8 m/secs2 9200Hz: 9.8 m/secs2
DIN IEC 68-2-6)
Shock resistance (whole sys- 50 m/secs2, 30 msecs, 300 m/secs2, 6 msecs,
tem TP 012 + PCU 50, tested 18 shocks 18 shocks
to DIN IEC 68-2-29)
Climatic environmental conditions
Heat dissipation 3) by natural convection
Operation Storage/transport
Temperature limit values 5 ... 45C 20 ... 60C
Tested to DIN EN 60068-2-2: 1994, DIN IEC 68-2-1,
DIN IEC 68-2-14
Limits for rel. humidity 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C
Tested to DIN IEC 68-2-3, DIN IEC 68-2-30, DIN IEC 68-2-56
Temperature change max. 10K/h
Condensation not permissible
Intake air without aggressive gases
Service life Backlight 50,000h
Notes
Soft keys
USB
front
interface
Soft keys
Machine area Recall ETC key Area
switchover
*) When the TEMP LED responds, increased wear should be taken into account
S the 15 display
S the USB front interface
S eight vertical and horizontal soft keys
S four control keys with the following functions:
Key Function corresponds to Key Function corresponds to
PC key function: PC key function:
<Shift> F10 F9
<Shift> F9 F10
8.2 Interfaces
8.2.1 Arrangement
Front USB front interface (see Fig. 8-1) for connection of external keyboard or mouse
on the front.
Note
Please note that, in respect of their EMC compatibility, many of the I/O devices
available from retail outlets are designed for office applications only.
For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certificate are recom-
mended.
Rear Two ribbon cables (Fig. 8-2) for connection of PCU on the rear:
S I/O USB cable K1: All signals that in addition to the display interface are
used for connecting operator panels.
S Display cable K2.
PCU 50
main board
PCU 50
8.2.2 Assignment
8.3 Installation
When combining OP 015 and PCU 50, it is recommended to install them in an
assembly panel prior to installation.
483
Top 2) 2) 2) 1)
1)
Casing
cover plate
3) 3)
Cover plate for
connections
310
Keyboard con-
troller
3) 3)
Display
cable K2
1)
IO USB 2) 2) 2) 1)
cable K1
Fig. 8-3 Rear side of operator panel front with allocation of interfaces and mounting slots
Thanks to the tension jacks fastening the OP 015, holes or screw holes are not
needed.
In addition, this type of fastening provides degree of protection IP 65 (however,
only in conjunction with a circulating seal and with the sealing cap of the USB
interface fitted).
A2 1
112 0.5 L3 1 L3 1 112 0.5
56 1
Rz 120
L1 +1
Fig. 8-4 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015 operator panel front
8.3.3 Installation
1. Insert the assembled components OP 015 and PCU from the front into the
panel cutout.
2. Locate the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the
six tension jacks (see Fig. 8-4) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 ...
0.5Nm).
B 1
267 0.5
H 0.5
Clearance for cables and ventilation
297 0.5 A2
T2 0.5
U
10 0.5
L 0.3
Fig. 8-5 Attaching the PCU to the OP 015 operator panel front
Mounting position The permissible mounting positions depend on the conditions of the attached
PCU (see Chapter Component PCU 50).
Front plate
Backlight with
backlight
inverter
LCD unit
Fig. 8-6 Spare parts for the OP 015 operator panel front
Caution
! Spare parts may only be replaced by trained personnel (sensitive components
may be damaged due to static electricity)!
The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described in
the following, since it is easy and self-explaining.
Front plate When changing the front plate, the existing USB interface and the display
holder (with display, backlight inverter and keyboard controller) can be reused.
Procedure:
1. Put the OP 015 like the replacement front plate with the front on a horizontal,
soft surface.
2. Loosen the casing screws (see Fig. 8-3) and remove the casing cover plate.
The display holder with the keyboard controller (Fig. 8-7) will be visible un-
derneath and, in a cutout of the mounting plate, the rear side of the USB
interface (Fig. 8-9).
Membrane lines
Connection X11 from the operator
(reserved) panel front keyboard
IO USB cable K1
Connection X4
(reserved)
Connection X14
for display and
back-lighting
Connection X12
(reserved)
X10 X8 X7
Connections for opera-
Display cable K2 tor panel front keyboard
3. Loosen the membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboard from
the sockets X7, X8 and X10 as follows:
Loosen the dark clamping frame of the socket by pressing it upward until
it locks in its upper, unlocked position (Fig. 8-8).
Carefully pull out the membrane end upwards.
Clamping frame
of socket
Fig. 8-8 Changing the operator panel front: Disconnecting a membrane connection
4. Loosen the membrane connection of the USB connection cable (Fig. 8-9) as
described under Point 3.
Display holder
USB interface
Fig. 8-9 USB interface viewed from the operator panel rear side
Note
When reattaching the membrane connections of the USB and keyboard
interfaces, observe the following order: With the clamping frame lifted, carefully
insert the end of the membrane into the socket; then press the clamping frame
down to lock it in place (see Fig. 8-10).
When tightening the screws, observe the relevant torques (see Section
Technical data).
Safety
Class of protection in conformity with VDE 0106 T1: 1982 (IEC 536)
Degree of protection Front IP 65 Rear IP 00
Safety regulations IEC in conformity with DIN VDE 0805/11.93
Approvals CE; FCC (Class 1 Div. II)
Electrical data (without PCU 50)
Power supply (via I/O Display Backlight in- Logic/USB
USB cable and display cable) verter
Voltage 5V +/ 5% 12V +/10% 5.2V +/ 2%
Current (typ. /max. mA; 420/600 900/1050 350 1)/1000 2)
approx.)
Power consumption approx. 15W typical approx. 24W maximum
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width 483mm Height 310mm Depth 52mm
(overall dimensions)
Weight approx. 7.5kg
Tension jack M3 screws: M4 screws:
Max. tightening torques
screws: 0.5Nm 0.8Nm 1.8Nm
Mechanical Operation Transport
environmental conditions (in packaging)
Vibration (whole system OP 1058Hz: 0.075mm 59Hz: 3.5mm
015 + PCU 50, tested to DIN 58200Hz: 9.8 m/secs2 9200Hz: 9.8m/secs2
IEC 68-2-6)
Shock resistance (whole sys- 50 m/secs2, 30 msecs, 300 m/secs2, 6 msecs,
tem OP 015 + PCU 50, tested 18 shocks 18 shocks
to DIN IEC 68-2-29)
Climatic environmental conditions
Heat dissipation 3) by natural convection
Operation Storage/transport
0 ... 40C (front) 20 ... 60C
Temperature limit values
0 ... 55C (rear)
Tested to DIN EN 60068-2-2: 1994, DIN IEC 68-2-1,
DIN IEC 68-2-14
Limits for rel. humidity 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C
Tested to DIN IEC 68-2-3, DIN IEC 68-2-30, DIN IEC 68-2-56
Temperature change max. 10K/h
Condensation not permissible
Intake air without aggressive gases
Service life Backlight 50,000h
1) Typ. value with 100mA load (low power device) on the USB front connector.
2) Max. value with 500mA load (high power device) on the USB front connector.
3) See also Chapter Heat Dissipation.
J
S Integrated mouse
S Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature
S Front-mounted USB interface
S Degree of protection IP65
S Attachment: clamps at rear
S Can be combined with the component PCU 50.
Numerical
key group
Cursor
Soft keys key group
Control
key group
USB
front
interface
Recall Machine area Area switchover ETC key Mouse
*) When the TEMP LED responds, increased wear should be taken into account
S The ALPHA key group contains the letters A, ..., Z and the blank.
S The numerical key group contains the digits 0 ... 9, the character and the
decimal point.
9.3 Interfaces
9.3.1 Arrangement
Front USB front interface (see Fig. 9-1) for connection of external keyboard or mouse
on the front.
Note
Please note that, in respect of their EMC compatibility, many of the I/O devices
available from retail outlets are designed for office applications only.
For industrial use, components with a higher degree of certificate are recom-
mended.
S Interface X11, normally hidden under the cover plate (Fig. 9-4):
Signals from the 16 direct control keys vertical soft keys.
PCU 50
PCU 50 main board
Cable clamp
for connection
of direct control
key submodule
IO USB
cable K1 Keyboard
controller
Direct control
key interface
X11
Interface
OP 015A X12 (reserved)
9.3.2 Assignment
Signal type
B: Bidirectional V: Voltage
X11: 2x8 vertical The control states of the vertical direct control keys can be picked up here with-
direct control keys out firmware. These signals can be evaluated in the direct control key submo-
dule and in pushbutton panels (e.g. PP031MC) with opto-isolated inputs.
Connector to DIN 41651 plug connector, cable length max. 0.5m.
DT1 DT9
DT2 DT10
DT3 DT11
DT4 DT12
DT5 DT13
DT6 DT14
DT7 DT15
DT8 DT16
9.4 Installation
When using OP 015A and PCU 50 and also possibly a direct control key sub-
module in combination (see Subsection 9.4.2), it is recommended to install them
in an assembly panel before final installation.
Width = 483
Top
3) 3) 4) 3) 3) 3) 4)
Display sup- 1) 1) 3)
port plate
3)
3)
Cover plate for
connections
Height = 355
Keyboard controller
Cable
clamp
3)
3) 4)
Display 1)
cable K2 2)
1)
3) 3) 3)
3)
I/O USB
cable K1 2)
1) Mounting slots for PCU straps 2) Cables shown folded 3) Casing screws
4) Slots for soft key labeling strips
Brief description The task of the direct control key submodule is to directly transfer the operating
signals for the two rows of keys on the side of the OP 015A (see Fig. 9-3) to
SIMATIC without diversion through intermediate firmware.
The OP 015A outputs the signals from the two rows of keys on the side on its
X11 terminal (see Fig. 9-2).
The direct control key submodule converts the key signals to PROFIBUS DP
protocol by means of the ASIC LSPM2 (PROFIBUS DIN 19245 Part 1, 12
Mbaud).
Power is supplied from the OP 015A PROFIBUS is completely isolated from the
direct control key submodule/OP 015A by means of an opto-coupler and
DC/DC converter.
The direct control key submodule operates as a slave on PROFIBUS. The ad-
dress can be set between 1 and 99 using a rotary switch. Two bytes of data are
transferred.
In SIMATIC, the keys are handled as if they were 16 ordinary digital inputs.
Thanks to the tension jacks, holes or screw holes are not needed.
In addition, this type of fastening provides degree of protection IP 65 (however,
only in conjunction with a circulating seal and with the sealing cap of the USB
interface fitted).
A1 1
S3 0.5 S3 0.5
1
Sealing
A2
1 area
112 0.5 L3 1 L3 112 0.5
112 0.5
56 1
Hole for
Rz 120
screw fastening
M6/ 7
Fig. 9-5 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015A operator panel front
9.4.4 Installation
Clearance The clearance on the PCU rear should amount to a minimum of 10 mm to make
sure that sufficient ventilation is provided (see Fig.9-6).
For more detailed information, please refer to Chapter Component PCU 50
and Chapter Heat Dissipation.
17.4
PCU 50 swung round 90
Required clearance
Clips
for ventilation
Mounting rail
358.7
297
10
Mounting rail
61.5
42
10
57.5 27.5
88.8 313.6 80.3
OP 015A
Fig. 9-6 Attaching the PCU 50 to the OP 015A operator panel front (viewed from above)
Mounting position The permissible mounting positions depend on the conditions of the attached
PCU (see Chapter Component PCU 50).
Making the labels If required, you can have new labels prepared and printed by Rafi or a screen-
printing shop. See Fig. 9-7 for dimensions.
391.65
353.50
279.00
16.00
Dimensions in mm
1. Loosen the four fastening screws of the PCU and tilt the PCU off the opera-
tor panel front.
2. Slide the labels from the rear of the operator panel front into the intended
slots (see Fig. 9-4).
3. Swing the PCU back towards the operator panel front and fix it in place by
tightening the screws.
If the PCU and operator panel front are already dismantled, omit steps 1. and 3.
LCD unit
Display holder
Sealing cap for the
USB connection Mouse Keyboard controller
Fig. 9-8 Spare parts for the OP 015A operator panel front
Caution
! Spare parts may only be replaced by trained personnel (sensitive components
may be damaged due to static electricity)!
The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks is self-explanatory and
is therefore not described.
The replacement of the front panel and the mouse is described in Chapter Op-
erator Panel Front OP 012 in Section Spare part replacement.
Safety
Class of protection in conformity with VDE 0106 T1: 1982 (IEC 536)
Degree of protection Front IP 65 Rear IP 00
Safety regulations IEC in conformity with DIN VDE 0805/11.93
Approvals CE; FCC (Class 1 Div. II)
Electrical data (without PCU 50)
Power supply (via I/O Display Backlight Logic/USB
USB cable and display cable) inverter
Voltage 5V +/ 5% 12V +/10% 5.2V +/ 2%
Current (typ. /max. mA; 280/380 750/1000 350 1)/1000
approx.) 2)/1200 3)
Caution
The PCU should not be mounted with the air stream at the bottom (i.e. the interfaces at
the top) to prevent heat accumulation.
Information is transferred between the NC controller and PCU, operator panel front and
MCP using MPI, USB and videolink transmission technology (see Fig. 10-1).
Note
Where the Windows NT operating system is used, the USB interface only supports key-
boards and mouse units.
If other USB devices are used, the noise immunity of the entire system may be reduced.
The end user takes responsibility for the use of such devices.
The operator panel front consists of a 15 display with horizontal and vertical soft keys in
the form of short-stroke keys.
In the case of turning and milling technologies, the MCP keys are labeled differently, the
displays on the operator panel front are different and a handwheel instead of the second
override switch is provided for the turning variant.
Communi- Since the PCU is installed physically separated from the operator panel front (distributed
cation installation), a data transmission line was created:
S The operator panel front (operator panel front + MCP) communicates with the PCU by
means of a cable and a videolink transmitter. The PCU transmits the image data us-
ing videolink technology and the keyboard data using USB technology.
As a result, the PCU and operator panel front can be installed up to 15m apart (XGA
resolution).
S NC and MCP functions on the operator panel front communicate by means of MPI.
S NC and PCU also communicate by means of MPI.
EMERGENCY There is an EMERGENCY STOP button on the operator panel front. This also has to be
STOP wired up (see Fig. 10-8).
Power The operator panel front and PCU must be supplied with 24V.
supply
Note
To prevent error messages when the PCU is booted, the operator panel front should be
switched on at the same time as the PCU using the 24V supply.
Order The order numbers of the individual components are listed below:
numbers
6FC5 203-0AF50-0AA0 SINUMERIK operator panel front 15 TFT, width 416mm,
with mech. buttons for integrated installation
6FC5 203-0AF50-1AA0 SINUMERIK operator panel front 15 TFT, width 416mm,
with mech. buttons for distributed installation up to 10m
6FC5 203-0AF50-2AA0 SINUMERIK operator panel front 15 TFT, width 416mm,
with mech. buttons for distributed installation up to 15m
6FC5 203-0AF50-3AA0 SINUMERIK 810D/840D machine control panel
width 416mm, milling version, mech. buttons, rapid traverse
and feedrate override, mouse, standard / US layout
6FC5 203-0AF50-4AA0 SINUMERIK 810D/840D machine control panel
width 416mm, turning version, mech. buttons, handwheel
and feedrate override, mouse, standard / US layout
(24 V) X206
PCU
X205
USB
X301 EMERGENCY 2.
STOP
X302
QWERTY
5.
(USB-B)
X303/304
(2 x USB-A)
MCP
NC X401
MPI
Override
X404
(24 V) Override/handwheel
Fig. 10-1 Function blocks of SINUMERIK operator panel front 15 TFT (width 416mm)
S Interfaces: Inputs:
1x videolink MDR 36
1x USB-B
1x 24V power supply, terminal (3-pin)
Outputs:
1x plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock
2x USB-A
1. QWERTY keyboard
The QWERTY keyboard features:
S MF2 keyboard (without function keys)
S Operating area keys: MACHINE, PROGRAM, OFFSET, PROGRAM MANAGER,
ALARM and CUSTOM
S Other keys: ALARM CANCEL, HELP, GROUP CHANNEL, INSERT, SELECT and
NEXT WINDOW
S Integrated mouse.
2. MCP
The MCP features:
4. Interfaces
S Outputs: 2x USB-A
2x 4-pin (reserved for optional interfaces,
not fitted in series)
5. Dimensions
WxHxD (mm): 416x370x107 (turning) / 84 (milling)
S Function: As above, plus ExtremeUSB for 20m and branch for second operator
panel front with videolink output for 1 ... 20m
S Interfaces: Outputs
2x videolink MDR 36 for 1, ..., 15m (max. of 20m)
2x USB-A
10.3.5 Cables
1. Videolink cable
3. USB connection cable between X205 (operator panel front) and X301 (MCP):
10-pin ribbon cable with fitted socket connectors (supplied with display unit)
10.4 Interfaces
Interface
Type Function Designation Type
Videolink interface X201 MDR 36
(incl. USB)
USB input (reserved) X202 USB-B
Operator USB output X203 USB-A
panel front USB output X204 USB-A
USB output X205 Plug connector (2 x 5-pin)
with lock
24V power supply X206 Terminal (3-pin)
USB input X301 Plug connector (2 x 5-pin)
with lock
MCP
USB in
input
ut X302 USB
USB-B B
(QWERTY
(reserved opt. to X301)
keyboard)
y )
USB output X303 USB-A
USB output X304 USB-A
MPI interface X401 SUB-D (9-pin)
Optional interface X402 Plug connector (1 x 4-pin)
4 pin)
(in ut, reserved)
(input,
MCP
Optional interface X403 Plug connector (1 x 4-pin)
(input reserved)
(input,
24V power supply X404 Terminal (3-pin)
Videolink (incl. USB) X101 MDR 36
USB interface X102 USB-A
LVDS input X103 Plug connector (2 x 10-pin)
Videolink I/O interface for operator X104 Plug connector (2 x 13-pin)
transmitter panels from PC
1 ... 10 m LVDS output X107 Plug connector (2 x 10-pin)
I/O interface for operator X108 Plug connector (2 x 13-pin)
panels to local operator panel
front
Same as videolink transmitter 1
Videolink
... 10 m; plus:
transmitter
second videolink (incl. USB) X105 MDR 36
1 ... 15 m
USB interface X106 USB-A
Videolink transmitter <=> Videolink 10 m: Order No.
display unit 6FX2002-1VL00-1BA0
15 m: Order No.
6FX2002-1VL00-1BF0
Cable Videolink transmitter <=> PCU LVDS Ribbon cable (20-pin)
Videolink transmitter <=> PCU I/O Ribbon cable (26-pin)
Display unit <=> operator panel USB Ribbon cable (10-pin)
front MPI Standard PROFIBUS
NC <=> operator panel front
Signal types The abbreviations in the Signal type column in the tables below have the fol-
lowing meanings:
I Input
O Output
B Bidirectional
V Voltage
OC Open Collector
X201 (Videolink Connector designation: X201; Mini D Ribbon (MDR), multiple contact strip
incl. USB) (36-pin)
3 A1M I
Data OPENLDI
4 A1P I
5 A2M I
6 A2P I
7 CLK1M I
I Clock OPENLDI
8 CLK1P
Enabling of LCD power supply
9 ENVCC_12V
I (12V level)
VI Reference ground
10 M_12V
for signals with 12V level
Shield for twisted pair
11 Shield
cables; connected to ground
12, ..., 21 Reserved
22 M Reserved (ground)
23 Reserved
24 M Reserved (ground)
25 M V Ground
Shield
26 Shield
for twisted pair cables
Received data A
27 RX_A / USB_M
I/B (Extreme USB) / USB data
I/B Received data B
28 RX_B / USB_P
(Extreme USB) / USB data+
Transmitted data A (Extreme
29 TX_A
O USB)
O Transmitted data B (Extreme
30 TX_B
USB)
31 BL_ON_12V Backlight On (12V signal)
I
32 M_12V VI Ground
RESET to hub
33 XRESET_HUB I (low active, 12V signal)
34 M_12V Ground
35 XPAN-PRES Operator panel front is present
O
I Ground from videolink transmit-
36 XPAN-PRES
ter, transmitted to Pin 35
X202 (USB interface Connector designation: X202; USB socket connector (4-pin), type B
input)
Table 10-3 X202 pin assignments
X203 / 204 (USB Connector designation: X203 / 204; USB socket connector (2x 4-pin),
interface output) type A
X205 Connector designation: X205; plug connector (2x 5-pin), grid 2.54mm
(QWERTY Interface is configured as high current USB
interface) (500mA).
The QWERTY keyboard has a total of five USB interfaces, four of which can be
used by the user (see Fig. 10-1). The integrated mouse is connected to the fifth
USB interface (X305).
S Interface X301 connects the keyboard to the videolink receiver. The maxi-
mum cable length is 10m.
S The keyboard can be connected to the PCU using interface X302 and a
cable of max. 10m in length.
S The two interfaces X303 and X304 are accessible by means of a two-tier
USB-A connector.
X301 / X302 The two interfaces X301 and X302 (see Fig. 10-1) are connected in parallel and
configured as high powered interfaces with max. 500mA, 5V.
S X301 is used to form the connection to the videolink receiver; max. permissi-
ble ribbon cable length: 1 m.
S X302 supports a standard USB cable with length of max. 5m. This cable can
be used to form a direct connection to, for example, the PCU (e.g. for load-
ing customer-specific keyboard tables).
Caution
! The two interfaces X301 and X302 should not be used simultaneously be-
cause they are connected in parallel.
X303 / X304 X303 / 304 is a double standard USB-A connector (see Fig. 10-1). X303 and
X304 are configured as low powered interfaces with max. of 100mA, 5V.
Connector designation: X303; USB-A connector (4-pin)
X401 (MPI) The MCP is connected to the MPI of the NC by means of interface X401.
Baud rate (max. of 1.5 Mbaud) and station address of the MCP at the MPI bus
are set at DIP switch S3 of the keyboard controller.
X11 / 12 (axis Depending on the panel variant, the operator panel front has one or two axis
override interface) override switches. These switches are connected to the MCP by means of rib-
bon cables.
Connector X11 is used to connect the rotary selector switch for feedrate over-
ride (32 graduations), irrespective of its installation position.
S With the milling version, the rotary selector switch for rapid traverse (32
graduations) is connected to X12.
S With the turning version, a handwheel is fitted in place of the rotary selector
switch. The handwheel is directly connected to the NC controller.
X101 / X105 Connector designation: X101/105; Mini D Ribbon (MDR), multiple contact
(Videolink incl. strip, (36-pin)
USB)
Table 10-14 X101/105 pin assignments
3 A1M O
Data OPENLDI
4 A1P O
5 A2M O
6 A2P O
7 CLK1M O
O Clock OPENLDI
8 CLK1P
Enabling of LCD power supply
9 ENVCC_X
(12V level)
10 M Ground
Shield for twisted pair cables;
11 Shield
connected to ground
12, ..., 22
23 Reserved
24
25 M V Ground
26 Shield Shield for twisted pair cables
Transmitted data A (Extreme
27 TX_A / USB_M
O/B USB) / USB data
O/B Transmitted data B (Extreme
28 TX_B / USB_P
USB) / USB data+
29 RX_A I Received data A (Extreme USB)
30 RX_B I Received data B (Extreme USB)
31 BL_ON_x Backlight On (12V signal)
O
32 M O Ground
RESET to downstream hub (low
33 XRESET_HUB O active, 12V signal)
34 M Ground
35 XPAN-PRES_x Operator panel front is present
36 M V Ground
Note
X106 is not available at present.
X103 (LVDS Connector designation: X103; plug connector (2x 10-pin), grid 2.54mm
input of PCU)
Table 10-16 X103 pin assignments
X104 (IO interface Connector designation: X104; plug connector (2-row), grid 2.54mm
for operator panels
from PC) Table 10-17 X104 pin assignments
X107 (LVDS Connector designation: X107; plug connector (2x 10-pin), grid 2.54mm
output to operator
panel front) Table 10-18 X107 pin assignments
X108 (IO interface Connector designation: X108; plug connector (2x 13-pin), grid 2.54mm
for operator panels
to local operator Table 10-19 X108 pin assignments
panel front) Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning
1 GND V Ground
Power supply for inverter (max.
2 P12V VI
1.1A)
3 BL_ON I Backlight On (5V ... 12V = ON)
4 P5V_fused VI + 5V VCC (fused)
5 GND V Ground
6 P3V3_fused VI + 3.3V VCC (fused)
7, ..., 10 NC not connected
11 P5V_fused VI + 5V VCC (fused)
12 USB_D1M USB data Channel 1
B
13 USB_D1P USB data+ Channel 1
14 GND V Ground
15, ..., 23 NC not connected
(Temperature error LED; anode
24 TEMP_ERR O with 1k in series on mother
board)
25/26 NC not connected
Note
All the displays used in a system must be of the same type (15 TFT).
If the setting is incorrect, the display may be irreparably damaged in a short
time.
DIP switch S2
S 10m transmitter variant (1x Videolink): 1 and 3 = any or S2 not
fitted
2, 48 = OFF
Transmitter The following LEDs indicate the operating status of the transmitter:
When the ExtremeUSB line is operating properly, both green LEDs of the transmitter
module (LEX) and both green LEDs of the receiver module (REX) light up on the video-
link transmitter.
Receiver The following LEDs indicate the operating status of the receiver:
When the ExtremeUSB line is operating properly, both green LEDs of the transmitter
module (LEX) and both green LEDs of the receiver module (REX) light up on the video-
link receiver.
Key layout
on MCP Table 10-22 Layout of the machine control keys (applies to turning and milling)
*)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
*)
*) 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
40 42
50 51 52 53 54
*) Low-active keys
Input image
of MCP Table 10-23 Assignment of input words/bytes to the machine control keys
(the numbers Key 00, ..., 54 correspond to the key numbers from Table 10-22)
*) Low-active keys
Notes:
S The Override2 function only exists in the milling version. This function does not
exist in the turning version; the bits concerned are each set to 1.
S Significance with override: A = 1, B = 2, C = 4, D = 8, E = 16.
.
.
. .
Videolink receiver
Dimensions in mm
Fig. 10-3 Front, side and rear view of operator panel front
Supporting plate
Operator panel
front
Connection for
2x USB-A videolink cable
Fig. 10-4 Rear perspective of the operator panel front with mounted videolink receiver
10.5.2 MCP
Milling MCP Fig. 10-5 shows the front and side view of the milling MCP. Fig. 10-7 shows the rear
view with the connections, programming switch S3 and the status LEDs.
Threaded bolt M5
Dimensions in mm Exchangeable key caps (see detailed drawing in Fig. 10-6)
Threaded Welded threaded bolts (see Fig. 10-6) instead of drilled holes with press-in sleeves are
bolts used to secure the operator panel front and the MCP.
Threaded bolt M5 Spacer ring
M5
10
5
23
Front plate
Fig. 10-6 Bolt for securing operator panel front and MCP (detail drawing from Fig. 10-5)
X302
X301 X303/4
X401
X404
S3 87654321
X402 X403
Ground terminal
H4 H3 H2 H1 M5 thread
Fig. 10-7 Rear view of MCP (milling and turning) showing position of the connections,
programming switch S3 and the status LEDs H1, ..., H4
EMERGENCY Fig. 10-8 shows the wiring of the emergency stop button.
STOP
1 2 1 2
Turning All of the information given above for the milling MCP also applies to the turning MCP.
MCP
Exceptions (see Fig. 10-9):
A handwheel is integrated in place of the second override switch.
The keys are different.
Exchangeable keys
Threaded bolt M5
Dimensions in mm Exchangeable key caps (see detailed drawing in Fig. 10-6)
PCU Fig. 10-10 shows the PCU with the mounted videolink transmitter
(see Subsection 10.6.3 for information on mounting).
Mounting bracket
114
PCU 50
for videolink transmitter
PCU 50
Fastening screws
Videolink
transmitter
PCU 50
Dimensions in mm
10.6 Mounting
Individual
components S Operator panel front
S Machine control panel with QWERTY keyboard and MCP
S Videolink transmitter.
The panel cutout for the operator panel front is shown in Fig. 10-11.
4.5
329+1
341
386+1
6.5
395
Dimensions in mm
Cable The operator panel front is connected to the other components by means of cables
connections (see Fig. 10-1)
S Videolink receiver:
The videolink cable connects interface X201 of the videolink receiver (mounted on
the rear of the operator panel front) to interface X101 of the videolink transmitter
(mounted on the rear of the PCU).
The cable is secured at the U-shaped panel cutouts on the rear of the operator
panel front using cable ties (see Fig. 10-12).
Securing in this way also relieves the strain on connectors which do not have
strong connector catches (e.g. USB).
Videolink receiver
Note
S Connector X302 on the machine control panel (QWERTY keyboard) can also
be connected directly to the PCU or a PC using a standard USB cable.
The panel cutout for the machine control panel is shown in Fig. 10-13.
5.5
7.5
334 +1
349
384 +1
6.5
395 Dimensions in mm
Proceed as follows:
1. Position the operator panel front so that its four threaded bolts (Fig. 10-9) are in-
serted in the mounting holes of the prepared panel cutout (Fig. 10-13).
The spacer rings (Fig. 10-9) ensure that the rubber seal is not squashed when
installed.
2. Secure the operator panel front from the rear side using the M5 nuts and suitable
circlips.
3. Attach the ground connection (see Fig. 10-7).
4. Connect the interfaces, except X404 (see Fig. 10-7).
5. Connect X404 to the 24V power supply (see Fig. 10-7).
Hinge
bolts
Threaded holes
for fastening
screws
Caution
To prevent damage, plug the cable connectors only into the sockets shown in
the photo.
2. Mount the first mounting bracket on the PCU (see Fig. 10-15).
Mounting bracket
3. Hook the videolink transmitter into this mounting bracket (see Fig. 10-17).
4. Fit the second mounting bracket after having attached it to the opposite
hinge bolt (see Fig. 10-14) of the videolink transmitter.
5. Plug the connecting cable into the connectors on the PCU (Fig. 10-16).
Videolink
transmitter
PCU 50
Fig. 10-16 Videolink transmitter hooked into place with the hinge bolts
6. Swivel the videolink transmitter into place on the PCU (see Fig. 10-17).
Hinge
bolts
PCU 50 PCU 50
Fig. 10-17 Hinge of the videolink transmitter before being locked in position
7. Push the videolink transmitter forwards in the locking mechanism (to the left
in Fig. 10-17, see arrow) until it locks down into place (see Fig. 10-18).
Videolink
transmitter
Hinge
bolts
Mounting
screw
PCU 50
PCU 50
8. Secure the videolink transmitter to the mounting brackets with the screws
supplied (see Fig. 10-18).
The videolink transmitter is now fastened to the PCU mounting rails
(see Fig. 10-19) and can be installed together with the PCU for its intended use.
Videolink
transmitter
PCU 50
Caution
If it is necessary to dismantle the videolink transmitter, please release the fas-
tening screws and slide the video transmitter horizontally before swiveling it
away from the PCU, in accordance with step 7. and Fig. 10-17.
Otherwise, damage is likely.
Table 10-26 Spare part kits for operator panel front 15 TFT
Replacement of Remove the handwheel in the following way (see Fig. 10-20):
handwheel 1. Slacken the two hexagon-socket screws in the rotary knob and pull the
rotary knob off the spindle.
2. Undo the three M3 fastening screws using a T10 Torx screwdriver.
3. Pull the handwheel backwards out of the front panel and disconnect the
wiring.
Grub screw
(hexagon-socket)
O-ring
Replacement of Remove a rotary selector switch in the following way (see Fig. 10-21):
rotary selector 1. Prise the cap (cover) off the rotary knob (snap-on fitting!).
switch
2. Loosen the nut of the collet using a wrench (width 10).
3. Pull the complete rotary knob off the shaft of the rotary selector switch.
4. Remove the nut on the shaft of the rotary selector switch from the front side
using a wrench (width 14).
5. Unplug the connector at the end of the rotary selector switch cable from the
receptacle.
6. Remove the rotary selector switch.
Dial
Cap
Arrow ring
1. Push the O-ring onto the shaft of the new rotary selector switch (for sealing
purposes).
2. Insert the rotary selector switch into the front cutout so that pressure is ap-
plied to the O-ring.
3. Fasten the nut on the shaft of the rotary selector switch from the front side
using a wrench (width 14).
Fig. 10-23 Both rotary selector switches installed (top switch [right] not yet connected)
Videolink transmitter
Table 10-29 Technical data for videolink transmitter
The necessary free convection surface area of the space to be enclosed (steel or
aluminum sheet, 1.5mm thick) is calculated, referred to a temperature difference
T2 T1 = DT 10K, approximately from:
!A = 0.4m2
Notes
11.1 Views
The Figures 11-1 to 11-5 show different views of the PCU 20.
Left *) Top *)
Right *)
*) Orientation relative to operation with the
19 operator panel fronts
Width = 297
Ext. floppy disk drive (optional)
Power supply interface
Fastening screws
Height = 267
Fastening screws
Fixing lugs
Interfaces
Fixing lugs
Nameplate
Note
The orientation drawings top, right, left etc. refer to the mounting position
when operated with OP 012 (see Fig. 11-1 and 11-7) viewed at the rear of the
PCU 20/OP 012 combination.
Depth = 56
53
PS/2 mouse COM1/RS-232-C COM2/RS-232-C USB Ethernet MPI/L2-DP Flash card/memory card
Port Function
COM1/RS-232-C Serial interface 1 (RS-232-C), 25-pin Sub-D socket connector
COM2/RS-232-C Serial interface 1 (RS-232-C), 9-pin Sub-D socket connector
PS/2 mouse/keyboard PS/2 mouse plug/keyboard connection
USB External connection for Universal Serial Bus
MPI/DP (RS-485) Multi-Point-Interface/PROFIBUS DP connection
Connecting an S7 programmable controller, 9-pin Sub-D socket
connector
Ethernet Connection for local area network (LAN), SW option
Memory card Slot for ATA flash card/memory card or
flash card 100/200 type I/II
I/O interface
Reset
Port Function
LVDS LVDS interface for TFT operator panel front
I/O for USB I/O interface for USB data
CMOS CMOS interface for STN operator panel front (X420)
24V 24V supply connection
Floppy Data interface (34-pin ribbon cable plug socket) for external
floppy disk unit
Note
Pressing the Reset button will cause a hardware reset. The PCU reboots.
X11:
Serial interface Table 11-4 Assignment for the serial interface COM2 (RS-232-C)
COM2
Pin Name Type Meaning
1 DCD I Receive signal level (carrier)
2 RxD I Serial received data
3 TxD O Serial transmitted data
4 DTR O Data Terminal Ready
5 GND V System ground (reference potential)
6 DSR (M1) I Data Set Ready
7 RTS O Request To Send
8 CTS I Clear To Send
9 RI I Incoming call
X6:
PS/2 keyboard/ Table 11-5 Assignment for the PS/2 keyboard/mouse interface
mouse interface
Pin Name Type Meaning
1 Keyboard_data I Mouse data line
2 Mouse_data I Unassigned
3 GND V System ground (reference potential)
4 P5 V +5V supply voltage
(current limited)
5 Keyboard_CLK I/O Mouse clock signal
6 Mouse_CLK I/O Unassigned
X805:
Ethernet RJ45 Table 11-8 Assignment for the Ethernet RJ45 interface
interface
Pin Name Type Meaning
1 TxD+ O Transmitted data +
2 RxD+ I Received data +
3 TXD O Transmitted data
4 RxD I Received data
5 to 8 Unassigned
Yellow Link O Yellow LED signal: Connected
LED
Green Activity O Green LED signal: Active
LED
Signal type
I: Input Input or receive (receive)
O: Output Output or transmit (transmit)
I/O: input/output Bidirectional (bidirectional)
V: Voltage Power supply (supply)
: shield/na Shield or not assigned (not available)
11.3 Start-up
The PCU 20 meets the relevant demands placed on a fire protection casing to
EN60950. It can therefore be integrated without an additional fire protection sur-
round.
Combination with When used in combination with the operator panel front (e.g. OP 012), the PCU
operator panel front 20 is first screwed to the operator panel front and this is then secured to the
assembly panel using tension jacks.
The procedure is described in this manual in the chapter about the operator
panel front concerned.
*)
Interfaces
Interfaces
Interfaces
Interfaces
Fig. 11-7 Permissible mounting positions of PCU 20 with the 19 operator panel fronts
An inclined position of 5_ is permitted. Vertical mounting is recommended.
Connecting I/O Before you connect the PCU to a power supply, you must connect an operator
devices panel front.
1. Insert the interconnecting cables for the operator panel front into the ap-
propriate sockets on the interface side of the PCU 20 (see Fig. 11-4 and
11-5).
2. After the operator panel front has been connected, the device is ready.
Information on how to adapt and set the interface and which connection cable
is required, is to be found in the manual of your I/O device.
Note
When connecting I/O devices, please make sure that the components are de-
signed for use in industry.
Caution
When plugging/unplugging I/O connections (keyboard, mouse, printer, etc.),
make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected from the power
supply. Otherwise damage may result.
This does not apply to USB connections.
Connecting the The PCU 20 is supplied with 24VDC (see Fig. 11-3).
power supply
Turning on and A mains switch is not provided so that the power supply is turned on/turned off
turning off by plugging/unplugging the power supply plug (see above).
After connecting the power supply, the preinstalled system boots automatically
and finally shows the start screen.
11.4 Accessories
Floppy disk drive The external floppy disk drive can be connected to the PCU 20.
The port for the external floppy disk drive is located on the left side panel of the
casing (see Fig. 114).
For further information on the floppy disk drive, see Chapter 3.5 Floppy Disk
Drive in this manual.
Safety
Degree of protection IP20
Protection class Protection Class I in conformity with VDE 0106 T1: 1982
(IEC 536)
Safety regulations IEC 950/09.91 in conformity with DIN VDE 0805/11.93
Approval CE; FCC (Class 1 Div. II)
Power supply 3) 24V/typ. 12W, max. of 16W
Mechanical data
Dimensions (mm) Width 297 Height 267 Depth 56
Weight approx. 4kg
Mechanical environmental Operation Transport
conditions (in packaging)
Vibration (whole system OP 1058Hz: 0.075mm 59Hz: 3.5mm
012 + PCU 20, tested to DIN 58200Hz: 9.8 m/secs2 9200Hz: 9.8 m/secs2
IEC 68-2-6)
Shock resistance (whole sys- 50 m/secs2, 30 msecs, 300 m/secs2, 6 msecs,
tem OP 012 + PCU 20, tested 18 shocks 18 shocks
to DIN IEC 68-2-29)
Climatic environmental conditions
Heat dissipation 1) Open-circuit ventilation
Operation Storage/transport
Power Temp. Temperature range
range
Temperature limits 12W 0 ... 55C 20 ... 60C
Tested to DIN EN 60068-2-2: 1994, DIN IEC 68-2-1,
DIN IEC 68-2-14
Limits for rel. humidity 5 ... 80% at 25C 5 ... 95% at 25C
Tested to DIN IEC 68-2-3, DIN IEC 68-2-30, DIN IEC 68-2-56
Temp. change; dewing max. of 10K/h; not permissible
Quality assurance to ISO 9001
Motherboard
Order No. 6FC5210-0DF00
...0AA0 ...0AA1 ...1AA1
...
Processor: Single-chip PC
166MHz 166MHz 233MHz
processor 2)
User memory (SDRAM) 16 MByte 32 MByte 32 MByte
Onboard FLASH memory 8 MByte 16 MByte 16 MByte
Operating system HMI embedded
Free expansion slots PCMCIA memory card
1) See also Chapter Heat Dissipation.
2) See ordering documents
3) For details, see Chapter Connection Conditions.
J
Notes
12.1 Views
Figures 12-1 and 12-2 show different views of the PCU 50:
Top *)
Right *)
*) Orientation with reference
to operation with OP 012
Fig. 12-1 PCU 50 v 500MHz: Perspective view with the hard disk drive installed
Width = 297
24V power supply Cover plate for connecting a Cover plate for PCI/ISA
PCI slot PCI slot slot connection
Slot 1
Depth = 80
Slot 2
PS/2 mouse LPT1 COM1 COM2 MPI/DP Cover plate for PC card slot
(serial
PS/2 keyboard VGA mouse) USB *) Ethernet
Port Function
LPT1/printer Parallel interface (e.g. printer), 25-pin Sub-D socket connector
COM1/RS-232-C Serial interface 1 (RS-232-C), 25-pin Sub-D socket connector
COM2 Serial interface 2 (RS-232-C), 9-pin Sub-D connector
Keyboard PS/2 keyboard connection
Mouse PS/2mouse plug
PCU 50 v 500MHz One external USB connection Windows NT: one can be used
USB
PCU 50 > 500MHz Two external USB connections for standard PC or mouse
Multi-Point-Interface/PROFIBUS DP connection
MPI/DP (RS -485)
Connecting an S7 programmable controller, 9-pin Sub-D socket connector
VGA VGA interface for external monitor, 15-pin Sub-D socket connector
Ethernet Connection for local area network (LAN)
PC card slot Slot for ATA flash card/memory card or flash card 100/200 type I/II
PCI slot Slot for expansion boards 1)
PCI/ISA slot Slot for expansion boards 1)
Power supply 24VDC
1)If expansion boards are installed, the cover plates in Fig. 12-3 are replaced by the front plates of the ap-
propriate module.
Please refer to the board description for further details.
Device fan Reset button Connection for external floppy disk drive (34-pin plug connector)
Fig. 12-4 Side view of PCU 50 from left with the port for an external floppy disk drive
The connection shown in Fig. 12-4 can be used to connect an external floppy
disk drive (see Section 12.5 and Fig. 12-16).
Note
Pressing the Reset button will cause a hardware reset. The PCU reboots.
There is a ground connection on the bottom side of the casing (see Fig. 12-5).
Ground connection
The two interfaces for the operator panel front to be mounted are located behind
a rectangular cutout in the rear side of the casing:
the IO interface for connecting the IO USB cable and
the LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display.
Procedure for mounting the operator panel front: see Subsection 12.3.1.
Parallel interface
LPT1 Table 12-2 Assignment for the parallel interface LPT1
Signal type
I: Input O: Output I/O: Input / output
: shield/na: Shield or not assigned (not available)
Serial interface
COM1 Table 12-3 Assignment for the serial interface COM1 (PLC/RS-232-C/modem)
Serial interface
COM2 Table 12-4 Assignment for the serial interface COM2 (RS-232-C/mouse)
PS/2 keyboard
interface Table 12-5 Assignment for the PS/2 keyboard interface
PS/2 mouse
interface Table 12-6 Assignment for the PS/2 mouse interface
USB interface
Table 12-7 Assignment for the USB interface (high current 500mA)
MPI/DP interface
Table 12-8 Assignment for the MPI/DP interface
VGA interface
Table 12-9 Assignment for the VGA interface
Ethernet RJ45
interface Table 12-10 Assignment for the Ethernet RJ45 interface
Display interface TFT displays with LVDS interface can be connected to this interface. It is pos-
(LVDS) sible to connect 18-bit displays with a resolution of up to 1024x768 pixels.
Max. cable length: 50cm.
Display interface D-STN and TFT displays with 5V CMOS interface and VGA resolution (640x480
(CMOS) pixels) can be connected to this interface.
Max. cable length: 50cm.
Power supply
interface Table 12-13 Assignment for the power supply interface
12.3 Start-up
12.3.1 Mounting
There are four mounting options for the PCU 50:
Notice
When attaching the mounting brackets, make sure that they are positioned
correctly (the brackets are not symmetrical).
Interfaces
Hard disk
Device fan
Interfaces
Device fan
Hard disk
Device fan
Device fan
Interfaces
Hard disk
Hard disk
Interfaces
Connecting I/O Before you connect the PCU to a power supply, you must unlock the hard disk
devices and connect up the I/O devices (operator panel front, keyboard, mouse, ...).
1. Insert the interconnecting cables of the I/O devices into the appropriate
socket connectors on the interface side of the PCU 50 (see Fig. 12-3 and
Table 12-1.)
2. After the I/O devices have been connected, the device is ready.
Information on how to adapt and set the interface and which connection cable
is required, is to be found in the Users Manual of your I/O device.
Note
When connecting I/O devices, please make sure that the components are de-
signed for use in industry.
Caution
When plugging/unplugging I/O connections (keyboard, mouse, printer, etc.),
make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected from the power
supply. Otherwise damage may result.
This does not apply to USB connections.
Connecting the The PCU 50 is supplied with 24VDC (see Fig. 12-3 and Subsection 12.4.2).
power supply
Caution
! The device should only be connected to a 24VDC power supply which satisfies
the requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV).
The cable cross-section must be large enough to ensure that no damage can
be caused by the cables if there is a short-circuit at the PCU.
Switching on and A mains switch is not provided which means that the device must be switched
off on and off at the external power supply.
When the power supply is switched on, the preinstalled system boots automati-
cally and finally shows the start screen (see IM4: Start-up Guide, Section Boot-
ing the system).
The PCU 50 is equipped with a PC card interfce. This can be used to operate
cardbus cards (32 bit) and PCMCIA cards (16 bit). Communication boards for
MODEM, FAX MODEM, ISDN, Token Ring, ETHERNET, memory extensions
and SCSI interfaces can be inserted in checkcard format.
BIOS settings Depending on the PCU configuration, it may be that there is no interrupt free to
operate a PC card.
If this is the case, reserve an interrupt in the BIOS setup by, in the PCI/PNP ISA
IRQ Resource Exclusion submenu, setting the interrupt the PC card needs to
reserved (default: available).
To operate the PC card, Cardbus/PCMCIA Slot in the BIOS SETUP, Hardware
Options menu, must be set to Enabled (default setting).
Caution
Before you insert the PC card, the ejector for cardbus/PC cards must be
fully depressed. Otherwise, if you are inserting slim PC cards (e.g. Flash
Memory Cards), the card may get stuck in the slot.
The PC card then cannot be inserted properly.
Before you insert or withdraw cardbus/PC cards, you must discharge your
bodys static loading by briefly touching a grounded object.
Otherwise faults can occur.
When you plug it in, the PC card nameplate must point towards the back of
the PCU.
Otherwise the PC card and/or the PCU could be damaged.
Only take out the card when data is no longer being transferred (risk of loss
of data and system crash).
Handling When inserting the card, proceed as follows (see Fig. 12-7):
1. Open the interface cover by loosening the plastic rivets with a flat-bladed
screwdriver (there are two parts).
2. Remove the cover plate from the guide.
3. Insert the required PCMCIA card or cardbus card.
Fig. 12-8 PCU 50 500MHz: Perspective view with the hard disk drive swung out
The installed hard disk drive is connected to the socket of the PCU mother
board via a ribbon cable (see Fig. 12-8).
Procedure:
1. Lock the shipping brace of the hard disk by turning the handle to the non
operating position (see Fig. 12-9).
2. Loosen the four fastening screws of the drive holder.
3. Swing the drive holder open (see Fig. 12-8).
4. Remove the ribbon cable from the socket. To this aim, press the two locking
noses of the connector rearwards.
5. Repeat the above steps in reverse order to install the new drive. The new
drive must be of the same type as the removed one.
6. Unlock the shipping brace; otherwise, the system will not boot (see
Fig. 12-10).
Fastening screws
*) Fastening screws of power supply cover Power supply
of power supply
Fig. 12-11 Removal/installation of the power supply (Art. No. A5E00166828)
Power supply
cover
Fastening
screws Fastening
screws
Power supply
Note
When installing the device fan, note the direction of flow from the device fan
(blower outward; note the arrow on the device fan casing).
Device
fan
Battery supply for A backup battery (3.6V lithium battery) supplies the hardware clock with power
clock and even when the device has been switched off. In addition to the time, the BIOS
configuration settings of the device are also stored. If the backup battery fails to operate or if it
is separated from the plug contact, these data are lost.
Thanks to the low power consumption of the clock and the high capacity of the
lithium battery, the battery can back up the clock for at least 8.5 years. For this
reason, changing the battery is hardly ever necessary.
Battery voltage too If the battery voltage is too low, the current time will be lost and a correct device
low configuration can no longer be guaranteed.
Changing the In this case, the backup battery must be replaced with a new one. The battery is
battery located on the main board (see Figs. 12-14 and 12-15).
Warning
! Risk of injury and damage, risk of pollutant discharge.
A lithium battery can explode if handled incorrectly. Pollutants can be dis-
charged if old batteries are not disposed of correctly.
Do not throw new or discharged lithium batteries into a fire. Do not solder the
cell body. Do not recharge lithium batteries. Do not force open lithium batteries.
Lithium batteries should only be ordered from Siemens (Order No.:
W79084-E1003-B1).
Wherever possible, old lithium batteries should be returned to the battery
manufacturer/recycler and disposed of as special waste.
Proceed as follows (PCU 50 v 500MHz, see Fig. 12-14; PCU 50 > 500MHz,
see Fig. 12-15):
1. Turn off the device, remove the mains cable and release all interconnecting
cables.
2. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Fig. 12-2).
3. Remove the battery plug (see also Fig. 12-23) from the socket on the mother
board and release the battery clip.
4. Install the new battery and secure it.
5. Plug the battery plug on the mother board.
6. Close the device.
Backup battery
Fixing hole for
board retainer
Battery
connection Connector for device fan
plug
Fig. 12-14 Main board PCU 50 v 500MHz (cutout) with location of RAMs and backup battery
RAM bank 1
RAM bank 0
Fig. 12-15 Main board PCU 50 > 500MHz (cutout) with location of RAMs and backup battery
12.5 Accessories
Accessories for PCU 50 are:
Fig. 12-16 shows the external floppy disk drive that can be connected to the
drive connection on the left side of the casing (see Fig. 12-4).
For further information, see Chapter 3.5 Floppy Disk Drive in this manual.
Two slots are provided on the mother board (Banks, see Fig. 12-14 and
12-15) for 144-pin SO DIMM memory modules. Use these modules to extend
the user memory of the PCU to 512MB.
Installation Procedure:
1. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Fig. 12-2).
2. Insert the module(s) into the base (Fig. 12-14). When doing so, pay attention
to the recess (anti-rotation element) on the plug side of the SO-DIMM mod-
ule.
3. Press the module downwards, applying slight pressure until the locking
snaps into place.
4. Close the device.
Caution
Risk of damage! The submodules must be seated firmly in the receptacle,
otherwise they may fall out and be damaged.
System boot The memory configuration is detected automatically when the system is booting
(see IAM: Start-up Guide, Section Booting the system).
Memory After expanding the memory, it is advisable to then optimize the use of the com-
optimization puter resources.
(Windows NT *) To do this, in the Windows interface Control Panel, increase the size of virtual
memory (also called the SWAP file) to correspond to the memory extension.
Proceed as follows:
1. When booting, use the Service menu to start the SINUMERIK Desktop, as de-
scribed in the HMI Advanced installation and startup (IM4) document in Sub-
section 3.4.5.
2. Activate the Control Panel by means of Start / Settings / Control Panel.
5. Activate the Set menu button and exit the menu by pressing OK.
Note
In the event of a repair and return of equipment, the memory extension is taken
into account.
In the event of a spare parts and return goods service, the memory extension is
not taken into account.
The PCU 50 is designed for use of modules according to the AT/PCI specifica-
tion (see Fig. 12-22).
Note
You must sign an OEM agreement before you can use PCI/ISA modules.
It is not recommended to use ISA modules, since with future PCUs, this inter-
face is not installed.
The dimensions of the boards must not exceed the specified dimensions.
Otherwise, contact problems, malfunctions and installation difficulty cannot be
ruled out. The diagrams show cards of the full AT/PCI overall length. Depending
on the slot, restrictions may apply with respect to the overall length.
17mm
6.89
106.7mm
4.201
A31 A1
17mm
6.89 121.92mm
4.8
C18 C1 A31 A1
174.6mm
6.875
106.66mm
8.19mm
4.2
0.322
26mm
10.48
106.68mm
4.2
8.19mm
0.322
Fig. 12-21 2/3-length PCI module (5V)
Note
To allow longer PCI modules to be guided along the guide rails of ISA modules,
they must be provided with a so-called extender. This should be included in the
scope of supply of the longer PCI module.
Split rivets
for device
fan
(see also
Fig. 12-13)
Fastening
screws for
cover plates
or external mod-
ule connections Board Fastening screw for
retainer board retainer
Fastening
Device screw for
fan board
retainer
Board
retainer
Battery
connector
Guide rail for
expansion
board
Plastic
support
1. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Fig. 12-2).
2. Release the fastening screw to remove the board retainer and remove
the plastic holder (if fitted) from its slot by pushing it through to the inside
(see Figs. 12-22 and 12-23).
3. Release the fastening screws to be able to remove the corresponding cover
plate (see also Fig. 12-3).
4. Carefully insert the module into the desired slot; firm seat should be en-
sured.
5. Screw the connecting plate of the module tight.
6. Install the board retainer.
7. Locate the module by inserting a new plastic holder (enclosed) into the ap-
propriate slot of the board retainer until it locates the edge of the module with
its groove. Use a diagonal cutter to cut off the protruding part of the plastic
holder.
8. Close the device.
The four mounting options for the PCU 50 have already been described in Sub-
section 12.3.1.
A special set of mounting brackets is available for each of these mounting op-
tions (see catalog).
If you let the system boot automatically, a query will appear on the screen
whether you will branch
1. to the User main menu or
2. to the Service menu.
As a user, you will usually choose no. 1. Use the Input key (see Fig. 12-24) to
confirm your selection and let the system boot to the chosen menu.
The following table contains all adjustable BIOS parameters together with their
default values:
*) BIOS lines PCI Device Slot 3 / Slot 4 and PCI IRQ Line 3 / Line 4:
only available for PCU 70 and PCU 50 v 500MHz;
only relevant for PCU 70
After installing or mounting additional components (e.g. ext. floppy disk drive),
these must be registered with the system in the BIOS setup.
You can activate this via the operator panel front (Fig. 12-24) as described be-
low.
1. Boot the device.
2. After you are prompted to activate BIOS Setup, press key <F2>. The BIOS
Setup menu will appear.
3. In the menu, use the cursor keys for navigating to the desired selection field,
e.g. Disk A:
4. Change the setting using the + key (simultaneously press <SHIFT> and
<X>) or the <> key (in the numerical key group).
5. If required, you can use the right/left cursor keys to go to other Setup
menus.
6. Use <Escape> (<Alarm Cancel> key) to access the Exit menu (can also be
accessed by continuously pressing the cursor right key).
7. Press the <Input> key to quit the setup menu.
8. Press the <Input> key to confirm your decision to exit BIOS Setup with
Yes.
Shift key
SHIFT
ALARM
Escape key
CANCEL
Input key
INPUT
F2 key
Fig. 12-24 PCU 50: Using the BIOS Setup via an operator panel front
Note
Any changes to BIOS settings, with the exception of the Boot sequence and
the LPT mode (EPP, EPC), require you to sign an OEM agreement.
Notes
Features The PCU 70 serves as the basic component for distributed PC-based machine
control panels (e.g. OP 012 or OP 015):
S Rugged design (continuous operation, high noise immunity)
S Dimensions (WxHxD): 297x267x122mm
S Service-friendly design
S Processor, min. Pentium III, 500MHz
S User memory (RAM), max. 512MB
S Hard disk, min. 10.4GB (interchangeable)
S Operating system, Windows NT 4.0
S Screen resolution: 640x480 (VGA), up to 1024x768 (XGA)
S Power supply 24VDC
S Interfaces:
Parallel interface (LPT1)
Serial interfaces, 2x RS-232-C
PS/2 keyboard interface
PS/2 mouse interface
MPI/DP (max. 12 Mbaud)
VGA interface for additional monitor
Ethernet connection 10/100 Mbaud
4 slots: 3x PCI and 1x shared PCI/ISA
PC card slot
USB interface
Interfaces to operator panel front (via videolink transmitter):
LVDS interface
CMOS interface
IO interface
Order numbers PCU 70: 500MHz, 128MB, Win NT4.0 6FC5 210-0DF04-0AA0
Flat mounting bracket (must also be ordered): 6FC5 248-0AF20-0AA0
13.1 Views
Left
Top
Right
Width = 297
Interface for ext. floppy disk drive
Screws securing
hard disk module
Handle of
shipping brace Hard disk module Depth = 122mm (without screws protruding)
24 V power supply Power supply shield Cover plates for PCI slot connections
Slot 3 (Slave)
Slot 4 (Slave)
Depth = 122
Slot 1 (Master/Slave)
Slot 2 (Master/Slave)
Fig. 13-3 Side view of PCU 70 from right (see Fig. 13-1) with interfaces
Port Function
LPT1/printer Parallel interface (e.g. printer), 25-pin Sub-D socket connector
COM1/RS-232-C Serial interface 1 (RS-232-C), 25-pin Sub-D socket connector
COM2 Serial interface 2 (RS-232-C), 9-pin Sub-D connector
Keyboard PS/2 trackball keyboard connection
Mouse PS/2mouse plug
USB External connection for Universal Serial Bus
MPI/DP (RS-485) Multi-Point-Interface / PROFIBUS DP connection; Connecting an S7 program-
mable controller, 9-pin Sub-D socket connector
VGA VGA interface for external monitor, 15-pin Sub-D socket connector
Ethernet Connection for local area network (LAN)
PC card slot Slot for ATA flash card/memory card or flash card 100/200 type I/II
PCI slot Three slots for expansion boards 1)
PCI/ISA slot Slot for expansion board 1)
Power supply 24VDC
1) If expansion boards are installed, the cover plates in Fig. 13-3 must be replaced by the front plates of the appropriate
module. See the description for the respective module.
Caution
The MCI board of the SINUMERIK 840Di should be fitted in Slot 1 only.
Fig. 13-4 Side view of PCU 70 from left (see Fig. 13-1) with the port for an external floppy disk drive
The connection shown in Fig. 13-4 can be used to connect an external floppy
disk drive (see Section 13.5 and Fig. 13-7).
Note
Pressing the Reset button will cause a hardware reset. The PC reboots.
There is a ground connection on the bottom side of the casing (see Fig. 13-5).
Ground connection
The two interfaces for connecting an operator panel front (via the videolink
transmitter; see Chapter Distributed Installation) are behind a rectangular cut-
out in the rear side of the casing:
the IO interface for connecting the IO cable and
the LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display.
Procedure for mounting the videolink transmitter: see Subsection 13.3.1 and
Chapter Distributed Installation.
13.3 Start-up
Notice
When attaching the mounting brackets, make sure that they are positioned
correctly (the brackets are not symmetrical).
Interfaces
Device fan
Hard disk
Device fan
Device fan
Interfaces
Hard disk
Hard disk
Interfaces
Impermissible mounting
position
Connecting I/O Before you connect the PCU to a power supply, you must unlock the hard disk
devices and connect up the I/O devices (operator panel front, keyboard, mouse, ...).
1. Insert the interconnecting cables of the I/O devices into the appropriate
socket connectors on the interface side of the PCU 70 (see Fig. 13-3 and
Table 13-1.)
2. After the I/O devices have been connected, the device is ready.
Information on how to adapt and set the interface and which connection cable
is required, is to be found in the Users Manual of your I/O device.
Note
When connecting I/O devices, please make sure that the components are de-
signed for use in industry.
Caution
When plugging/unplugging I/O connections (keyboard, mouse, printer, etc.),
make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected from the power
supply. Otherwise damage may result.
This does not apply to USB connections.
Connecting the The PCU 70 is supplied with 24VDC (see Fig. 13-3).
power supply
Caution
! The device should only be connected to a 24VDC power supply which satisfies
the requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV).
The cable cross-section must be large enough to ensure that no damage can
be caused by the cables if there is a short-circuit at the PCU.
Switching on and A mains switch is not provided which means that the device must be switched
off on and off at the external power supply.
Spare part Information on spare part replacement is given under Spare parts in Chapter
replacement Component PCU 50.
It is important to note that the power supply cover of the PCU 70 has one screw
more than the PCU 50 (see Fig. 13-2)
13.5 Accessories
Two slots are provided on the mother board (Banks, see Changing battery in
Chapter Component PCU 50) for 144-pin SO DIMM memory modules. Use
these modules to extend the user memory of the PCU to 512MB.
Table 14-1 Max. permitted number of operator panel fronts which can be combined with a PCU in a distributed instal-
lation
S Videolink receiver for mounting on a TFT operator panel front (OP 010 S/C,
OP 012, OP 015, OP 015 A, TP 012)
Note
OP 010 is not supported (owing to STN color display).
Note
The various transmitter and receiver types cannot be freely combined with
each other.
Table 14-2 shows which combinations are possible.
Table 14-2 Possible combinations of the various transmitter and receiver types
The order numbers are 6FC5247-...
14.1 Overview
Caution
All of the displays used in a system must have the same resolution since they
can be damaged within a few seconds if they are incorrectly set.
It is therefore essential to observe the Caution note in Subsection 14.4.1!
14.1.1 Configurations
Fig. 14-1 and 14-2 show the possible configurations for the distributed installa-
tion:
Videolink 6FX20021VL001xx0
Videolink
Transmitter Videolink receiver
Videolinkreceiver
Transmitter1:1
1:1
PCU
PCU Operator panel frontfront
Operator panel
2xUSB
USB
USB USB
Mounting bracket
6FC5 2480AF000AA0 or
6FC5 2480AF201AA0 required
Videolink 6FX20021VL001xx0
Videolink Videolink receiver
Videolinkreceiver
Transmitter
Transmitter1:2
1:2
PCU
PCU Operator panel
Operator frontfront
panel
2xUSB
USB
Videolink receiver
Videolinkreceiver
USB USB 6FX20021VL001xx0
Mounting bracket Operator panel
Operator frontfront
panel
6FC5 2480AF000AA0 or
6FC5 2480AF201AA0 required
2xUSB
Videolink transmitter
PCU
transmitter
USB
Videolink
Mounting bracket
6FC5 248-0AF20-2AA0
PCU
required
Fig. 14-1 Distributed installation configuration with up to two operator panel fronts
Configuration with In Fig. 14-1 (left top and center), the PCU and videolink transmitter components
up to two operator are combined to form a unit. They can be mounted physically separated from
panel fronts the operator panel front, i.e. in a distributed installation (e.g. in a control cabi-
net).
The two installation options shown bottom left can be used: flat mounting and
upright mounting.
A third installation option (not shown here), central mounting, is identical to flat
mounting, except an additional operator panel front is directly mounted behind
the videolink transmitter (see Fig. 14-2).
The mounting kits (see Subsection 10.5.3) must be ordered separately (see
below).
The associated operator panel front and videolink receiver components which
are combined to form a unit are shown on the right. They can be mounted in an
operator console.
Configuration with Fig. 14-2 shows another application option for distributed configuration:
up to 3 operator The PCU with the videolink transmitter is mounted behind an additional (central)
panel fronts operator panel front (not intended for OP 010S). This allows up to three operator
panel fronts to be operated at a PCU at the same time.
PCU
PCU USB
Videolink
Videolink transmitter 1:1 Videolink receiver
VideolinkReceiver
6FX20021VL001xx0
Operator panel front Operator panel front
2xUSB
USB
USB USB
Mounting bracket
Receiver
6FC5 2480AF203AA0 required
PCU
PCU USB
Videolink
Videolink transmitter 1:2 Videolink receiver
VideolinkReceiver
6FX20021VL001xx0
Operator panel front Operator panel front
2 xUSB
USB
USB USB
2xUSB
USB
Mounting bracket
6FC5 2480AF202AA0 required
Fig. 14-2 Configuration with up to three operator panel fronts on one PCU
Notice
If a central operator panel front is used, it is important to ensure that DIP switch
S2 of the videolink transmitter is set to the correct position (see Section 14.4).
14.1.2 View
Videolink
transmitter 1:2
PCU 50
Videolink
cable ( 20m)
Fig. 14-3 View of distributed installation: Example with two OP 012 operator panel fronts
Power supply Operator panel fronts, PCU and videolink receivers should be supplied with
24VDC (the videolink transmitter is supplied with power from the PCU).
Note
To prevent error messages when the PCU is booted, the operator panel front
should be switched on at the same time as the PCU via the 24VDC supply.
Configuration Fig. 14-4 shows a videolink transmitter (mounted on the PCU with the aid of the
flat mounting bracket, see Subsection 14.5.1).
*) Always observe Subsection 14.4.1! Cover plate
for covering the opening used
to connect a central operator
Flat mounting panel front
bracket
Videolink
transmitter
Display coding
switch S1 *)
USB-A
PCU 50
Connections for
videolink cable USB-A
Fig. 14-4 PCU with videolink transmitter (1:2 variant) and flat mounting bracket
Description The videolink transmitter is mounted on the underneath of the PCU between the
mounting brackets. It does not require a separate power supply because it is
supplied via the interfaces to the PCU.
S Outputs:
1x videolink for 1, ..., 20m (video data plus USB signals)
1x USB-A
1x LVDS interface (for connecting a centr. operator panel front)
1x IO/USB interface ( )
S Inputs: same as 1.
S Outputs:
2x videolink for 1, ..., 20m (video data plus USB signals)
2x USB-A
1x LVDS interface (for connecting a centr. operator panel front)
1x IO/USB interface ( )
Videolink cable
Cable tie
(see Section 14.6)
Keyboard interface
Power supply
Supporting plate
Fig. 14-5 Videolink receiver for mounting to OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A or TP012
S Inputs:
1x videolink for 1, ..., 20m (video data plus USB signals)
1x 24VDC power supply
S Outputs:
2x USB-A
1x keyboard interface (for USB keyboard)
1x LVDS interface (not visible in Fig. 14-5)
1x IO/USB interface ( )
14.2.3 Cables
The housing can be removed on angular connectors. This reduces the outer
dimensions and allows the connector to be introduced into conduits with 35mm
diameter or greater. The minimum diameter for permanently mounted connec-
tors is 42mm.
Note
These high-quality cables should not be shortened or lengthened.
For technical reasons, the length is limited to max. of 20m.
14.3 Interfaces
Interface
Type Function Designa- I/O Type
tion
Videolink (incl. USB) X101 O Multiple contact strip,
36-pin
USB interface X102 O USB-A
LVDS interface X103 I Plug connector, 2 x
Videolink
10-pin
transmit-
I/O interface for operator X104 I/O Plug connector, 2 x
ter
panel of PC 13-pin
1:1
LVDS interface X107 O Plug connector, 2 x
to central operator panel front 10-pin
I/O interface to central X108 I/O Plug connector, 2 x
operator panel front 13-pin
same as videolink transmitter
Videolink
1:1; in addition:
transmit-
second videolink (incl. USB) X105 O Multiple contact strip,
ter
36-pin
1:2
USB interface X106 O USB-A
Videolink (incl. USB) X201 I Multiple contact strip,
36-pin
USB interface X203/204 O 2x USB-A
Keyboard interface X205 O Plug connector, 2 x
Videolink 5-pin
receiver Power supply X206 I Terminal block, 3-pin
I/O interface to operator X207 I/O Plug connector, 2 x
panel 13-pin
LVDS interface X208 O Plug connector, 2 x
10-pin
10m
Vid
Videolink
li k ttransmitter
itt <=>Video-
Vid 15m
Videolink I/O
link receiver
Cable 20m
LVDS Flat ribbon, 20-pin
Videolink transmitter <=> PCU I/O
I/O Flat ribbon, 26-pin
Signal types The abbreviations in the Signal type column in the tables below have the fol-
lowing meanings:
I Input
O Output
B Bidirectional
V Voltage
OC Open Collector
Signal
Pin Signal name Meaning
type
1 USB_P5V_fused VO + 5V (fused) for external USB interface
2 USB_D0M Data
O USB channel 0
3 USB_D0P Data +
4 USB_GND V Ground for external USB interface
_________________________________________________________
1) X106 is switched off via switch S2 with transmitter 1 : 2 only (see Section 14.4).
Note
It is advisable to use only self-powered hubs (i.e. hubs with their own power
supply).
X203 / X204 (USB) Both interfaces are designed as high-current USB (500 mA)
Connector designation: X203 / X204; USB socket connector,
2 x 4-pin, type A
Max. line length: Mouse, printer, keyboard: 5m
If hub used: 3.5m 2)
_________________________________________________________
2)Length incl. supply lead to hub and connected terminal; max. of one hub is permitted. It is
important to note that some keyboards already have a hub.
Videolink USB
transmitter interface
Illustration not to
scale !
Fig. 14-7 Rotary selector switch S1 for setting the display type, here shown with factory
setting (switch setting 0)
For space reasons, the values 1, 3, ..., F are replaced by lines in the illustra-
tion.
Note
When supplied, S1 is set to 0.
Before operation, S1 must be set to the used display type according to the
list above.
The selected switch setting only becomes effective when the PCU is
(re)started.
All displays used in a system must have the same resolution.
Caution
If the setting is incorrect, the displays could be damaged within a few seconds.
DIP switch S2 With the 1:2 configuration, the USB signal must be switched to the selected
interfaces (X106 or X108) using S2. The default setting is activation of the inter-
nal interface X108. Interface X106 can only be used for flat and upright
mounting.
X 106
2
X 108
1
2
The recommended default setting for S2 is 2/2 (central operator panel front).
Notice
If a central operator panel front (see Subsection 14.1.1) is connected to
X107/108, the DIP switch S2 must be set to X108 (2/2), otherwise the key-
board, mouse and USB connector on the operator panel front will not function.
The second USB interface X106 cannot then be used.
Temperature A temperature monitor is integrated in the receiver module. When the threshold
monitor 75 5C is exceeded, the TEMP LED on the operator panel front lights up.
The LED goes out again when the temperature falls below the threshold
69 5C.
Note
S The tightening torque for all screws is: M3: 0.8Nm / M4: 1.8Nm
S To ensure optimum heat dissipation, we recommend the mounting
positions:
Device fan upwards
Device fan to left (not possible with upright mounting; Subsection
14.5.2)
PCU + videolink Assemble the PCU and videolink transmitter in the following way:
transmitter
1. Check switch S2 (if fitted). With flat mounting, it must be set to 1/1 (X 106)
(see Subsection 14.4.1).
2. Set S1 according to the used display type.
Caution
To prevent damage, it is essential to observe Subsection 14.4.1 when set-
ting S1.
Hinge
bolts
USB inter-
face X 102
USB interface
X 106 Threaded holes
for fastening
DIP switch S2 Rotary selector switch S1 screws
PCU 50
Flat mounting bracket
3. Mount one mounting bracket on the PCU first (see Fig. 14-10).
4. Hook the videolink transmitter into this mounting bracket (see Fig. 14-12).
5. Mount the second mounting bracket after having attached it to the opposite
hinge bolt (see Fig. 14-9) of the videolink transmitter.
6. Plug the connecting cable into the socket on the PCU (Fig. 14-11).
Videolink
transmitter
PCU 50
Fig. 14-11 Videolink transmitter hooked into place with the hinge bolts
7. Swivel the videolink transmitter into place on the PCU (see Fig. 14-12).
Videolink
transmitter
Hinge
bearing
Hinge
bolts
Flat mount-
ing bracket
PCU 50
Fig. 14-12 Hinge of the videolink transmitter prior to alignment on the PCU
8. Slide the videolink transmitter along the angular hinge bearing (to left in Fig.
14-12, see arrow) and push it into the position shown in Fig. 14-13.
Videolink
transmitter
Hinge
Mounting bolts
screw
PCU 50
9. Secure the videolink transmitter to the mounting brackets with the screws
supplied (see Fig. 14-13).
The videolink transmitter is now fastened to the PCU mounting brackets
(see Fig. 14-14 and 14-15) and can be installed together with the PCU for its
intended use.
Caution
If it is necessary to dismantle the videolink transmitter, please release the fas-
tening screws and slide the video transmitter horizontally before swiveling it
away from the PCU, in accordance with step 8. and Fig. 14-12.
Otherwise, damage is likely.
Cover plate
Videolink transmitter
over connec-
tion for cen-
tral operator
panel front
PCU 50
PCU 50
Mounting slots
for M4 screws
Videolink
transmitter PCU 50
Device fan
309 Dimensions in mm
Fig. 14-15 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the flat mounting brackets
Installation of With flat mounting, the assembly unit comprising the PCU and videolink trans-
PCU/transmitter mitter is mounted flat against the control cabinet wall panel (see Fig. 14-1).
unit Features:
S Easily accessible hard disk
S Relatively large amount of space required in control cabinet.
PCU + videolink Assemble the PCU and videolink transmitter in the following way:
transmitter
1. Set the switch S2 (if fitted) to 1/1 (X106; see Subsection 14.4.1).
2. Disconnect the two cables from the transmitter.
3. Insert the free ends of the ribbon cables in the sockets of the PCU first (see
Fig. 14-11).
4. Reconnect the two cable ends to the transmitter.
5. Screw the PCU and videolink transmitter together using the upright mount-
ing bracket (see Fig. 14-16).
6. Set the display switch S1 to the used display type.
Caution
To prevent damage, it is essential to observe Subsection 14.4.1 when set-
ting S1.
280
Upright mounting bracket for joining the PCU and videolink transmitter
7.3
Upright mounting bracket for joining the PCU and videolink transmitter
PCU 50
Upright mounting brackets
PCU 50
375.6
360
together and for mounting to the assembly panel
17.5
Videolink transmitter
together
Mounting
50 slots for
PCU 50 85 M4/M5
113 screws
Fig. 14-16 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the upright mounting
brackets
Installation of With upright mounting, the rear plate of the PCU/videolink transmitter unit is
PCU/transmitter mounted at an angle of 90 to the rear panel (see Fig. 14-1).
unit Features:
S Only one mounting position possible: fan at top
S Space required with PCU 50 less than that required for flat mounting
S Keep a clearance for hard disk operation (approx. 10cm).
PCU + videolink The components are joined together in the same way as for upright mounting,
transmitter with the following exceptions:
S Switch S2 (see Subsection 14.4.1) (if fitted) must be set to 2/2 (X108).
S The cover plate on the transmitter (see Fig. 14-14) must be removed prior to
mounting.
S The central mounting brackets are used (see Fig. 14-17).
S The assembled PCU/videolink transmitter unit is connected to an operator
panel front and secured using the knurled screws of the mounting brackets
in the way described under Installation in Chapter Operator Panel Front
OP 012.
289 117.8
24.8
PCU 50
PCU 50
338.4
124
Videolink transmitter
PCU 50
Device fan
Dimensions in mm
Fig. 14-17 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the central mounting brack-
ets to be attached to the operator panel front
Installation of With central mounting, the PCU/videolink transmitter unit is mounted in the
PCU/transmitter usual way directly behind an operator panel front.
unit Features:
S Mounting depth of the operator panel front increased by approx. 30mm
S Not possible with OP 010S, not possible with PCU 70 (too heavy).
OP 010S The operator panel front OP 010S and the receiver are screwed together with-
out additional mounting brackets.
86.8
36
Fastening screws
4xM3 for
fastening receiver
OP 010S supporting plate
to operator panel
front (1 of 4)
265
Videolink
13.4
receiver
260
Supporting plate
Fig. 14-18 Front, side and rear view of operator panel front OP 010S with screwed-on videolink receiver
OP 010C, OP 012, To allow the receiver to be mounted to the operator panel fronts OP 010C, OP
OP 015, OP 015A, 012, OP 015, OP 015A and TP 012 (see Fig. 14-5), two mounting brackets
TP 012 must be screwed on, which in turn (like a PCU) must be fitted and screwed to
the operator panel front.
OP 012
OP 012
42
Knurled screw for attaching the supporting plate to
the operator panel front (1 of 4) Supporting plate
Videolink
receiver
OP 012
269
Videolink cable
USB cable
260
338.4
Dimensions in mm
Fig. 14-19 Front, side and rear view of operator panel front (example: OP 012 with screwed-on videolink receiver;
order No. 6FC5 247-0AF22-0AA0)
Operator panel For the technical data of the operator panel fronts, please refer to the corre-
front sponding chapters: OP 010S, OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A and
TP 012.
PCU 50 / 70 For the technical data of the PCUs, please refer to the corresponding chapters:
PCU 50 and PCU 70.
Videolink transmitter
Table 14-9 Technical data for videolink transmitter
Videolink receiver
Table 14-10 Technical data for videolink receiver
15.1.1 Introduction
Key- NC-CPU
board
con-
troller
COM PLC
COM MPI
OPI/MPI
Individual wiring
interface
HT6
HPU
HHU
Programming device (PG)
PP 012 extension
Application Machine control panel for machine tools in conjunction with the control systems
810D, 840D, S7-300 and FM NC.
Communication The p.c. board is connected to the control system via the MPI interface.
MPI/OPI The PP 012 is connected to the appropriate control system via the MPI/OPI
interface interface. DIP switches allow you to select a parameter set from three possible
variants (see Tables 15-48 to 15-50).
PG interface Data and control signals correspond to the OPI. Handheld programming de-
vices require an external 24V power supply for operation.
The interface is not supplied with an external 5V potential (P5.EXT).
COM interface Carries the signals from the COM interface of the operator panel to the PP 012.
Inputs/outputs in 60 inputs and 26 outputs are assigned functions by the PP 012. The transmis-
control system sion is word by word.
Inputs for The printed circuit board distributor has three isolated inputs.
custom-made
wiring
EMERGENCY When actuated, the EMERGENCY STOP chain will ensure your own personal
STOP chain safety, as well as to protect the product in case of danger. The EMERGENCY
STOP chain is also active when the handheld units are removed. The Emer-
gency Stop button can be jumpered on the handheld unit by pressing S11 when
the handheld unit is plugged/removed.
This is necessary to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP chain from being inter-
rupted.
Note
To effectively deal with any malfunction by the jumpering key S11 (e.g. jam-
ming), the user PLC program must generate EMERGENCY STOP when a
monitoring time (approximately 5min.) expires (see Figs. 15-7 and 15-17).
Actuating The actuating elements S1 to S4, S7 to S10, S14 and S15 are connected to the
elements control system via the MPI/OPI. In addition, they have isolated contacts (com-
mon root) for custom-made wiring.
Lamps The lamps HS1 to HS4, HS7 to HS10, HS14 and HS15 are connected to the
control system via MPI/OPI. Alternatively, they can also be controlled from ex-
ternal non-isolated contacts.
EMERGENCY are also connected to the control system via MPI/OPI and have isolated con-
STOP and tacts for custom-made wiring.
mode selector
switches
Function blocks
PP 012 S Interface/CPU/monitoring
S Distributor with repeater
S Handheld unit connection XS12
S I/O connection X20, X21
S Direct control key connection X19
S Interconnecting cable COM X26
S 4-stage mode selector switch WS1
S Feed override WS2
S Speed/rapid traverse override WS3
S Max. 12 control devices, one of them an Emergency Stop button S13 and a
jumper button S11
S Max. 10 pilot lamps that can be controlled either from PLC or externally
S Inputs for configuring global data (GD) (DIP switches)
S Isolated operator panel front interface X15 with additional programming de-
vice interface X16
S DIP switches for generating S16, S17, S18 (baud rate, node address)
S Power supply.
Function blocks
PCB input/output S 16 isolated outputs for controlling lamps, four of them optional (key matrix
option)
S 14 isolated inputs for scanning individual keys/switches
S Key matrix option up to 120 keys can be scanned
S Short-circuit-proof 24V output for external keys
S Matrix keys momentary-contact.
Function blocks
PCB direct keys S 16 isolated inputs for scanning the direct keys from the operator panel
Fig. 15-2
15.3
11.02
I/O (option) Direct keys COM
10.00
1
F1 Authorization Conn-
X21 X20 X19 X27 WS4
3 1P24 key-operated X26 ection
switch to OP
2 Filter 1M24 16 VCC GND GND 16 GND
D0 ... D15 GND SB VCC GND
2P24 60
Block diagram of PP 012
X8
Block diagrams
X18.1
Operating modes 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 5 6 GND
X12 power MPI 10 Speed C
51
9 WS1 5 GND 4
Block S1/HS1
ON MPI /
6 52
13 Test Rapid 16
10 7 50
Blocks S2/HS2
Blocks S3/HS3
Blocks S4/HS4
Blocks S7/HS7
Blocks S8/HS8
Blocks S9/HS9
Blocks S10/HS10
Blocks S14/HS14
Blocks S15/HS15
15 8 X13 X14 traverse 8
Conn.
11 Override 2
GND 1) X18.2
WS3
30 49
1 2 3 1
PG
50
EMERGENCY STOP 52
GND X25 HS1
S13
interf.
PG
2P24
GND
X16
M24
1M24
GND
VCC
GND
X13 C
4 59
OPI
X11 4 4 Feed
Filter X15 16 61
78 12 11 10 9 1 2 X2 3 4 X1 X6 override 8 60
WS2 2 58
1) 57
3M24
3P24
Repeater 4 18 3221 17 Switch 1
GD project S18.2
S18.3
X17
S16.1
S18.4
13 =1
2
Emergency Stop circuit1
Emergency Stop circuit2
1 8 9 10 11 12 26 27 28 29 14 16
2 15
3 7
4 16 17
II only
With distrib.
Jumper S1 S2
Block S14
16
Block S7
Block S8
Block S9
Block S10
Block S4
Block S3
Block S15
X23 S11 X23 11
GND
GND
4 21 22 3 (+)
1 14 13 2 1 GND
14
12
HPU/OPI
2P24
5 X1
2 4 X10 3 1 3 21
M24 X5
2P24
X24 X4
4 3 2 1
8 9 6
7 11 1 2 12 3 4 5 10 XS12 5 1 6 7 11 12 X6
X11 6 5 4 2 3 1 10 9 2 X3 3 8 4 3 21
15-279
Br1
Custom-made PCB HPU
wiring
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components Manual (BH) 11.02 Edition
Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved
10.00
11.02
4
X40
3
GND
2
M24 (even)
1
PB
VCC
Key Matrix
4
W12
M Ext.
Option
X43
X19
3
W11
19 20
2
W10
1
W9
16
Block F16
7 8
HS31 F16
X42
15
Block (HS28...HS31) HS30 Block F15
6
4
W7 HS29 F15
14
5
HS28 Block F14
3
W6 F14
X42
13
(PB) Block F13
2
W5 F13
7 8
Block E19 E19 HS27
12
Block F12
X41
1
11
Lock by HS25 Block F11 F11
5
manually latched switching HS24
10
Block F10
4
9
Block E54 Block F9
X41
8
W4 E54 HS23 F9
X47
7
2
6
1
7
GND HS20 Block F7 F7
4
Block E23
R10 E23
Block F6
6
X47
VCC
3
5
2
Block E21
15 Operator Component PP 012
R8 E21 Block F5 5F
X21
Block E14
4
R7 E14 Block F4
24 V / 0.5A
Block E63 D(15:0) 4F
4
6 7 8
E63 HS19
3
R6
X46
Block F3
X46
Block E62 3F
3
E62 HS18
Memory
R5
2
Block E61 GND HS17 Block F2
2
2F
15.3 Block diagrams
R4 E61
X30
HS16
1
1
R2 E24
X45
Block E12
2
F1
17 18
M24 WDR1
3
R1
10A
E12
1
1
F1
X44
M24
2
10A
M24
15-280
Fig. 15-4
Fig. 15-3
2F
I<0.7A
3
P24_5 P24
11.02
10.00 15 Operator Component PP 012
15.4 Control elements
Position of
control elements LOGO S1
HS1
S2
HS2
S3
HS3
S4
HS4
S14
HS14 70
80 90
100
110
power 60
0 120
A B C D E K F G H I
Machine Manufacturer
For further or different reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP:
See machine tool manufacturers instructions!
Power S Display of power supply, lights green when controller operating voltage
> 4.7V
Notice
When used as a mode selector switch, the keyswitch should be used accord-
ing to Guideline 89/392/EWG.
Variably fitted S In slots S1 to S4, S7 to S10, S14 and S15, control devices can be installed
actuating elements as per Table 15-54.
S To effectively deal with any malfunction by the jumpering key S11 (e.g. jam-
ming), the user PLC program must generate EMERGENCY STOP when a
monitoring time (approximately 5min.) expires (see Figs. 15-7 and 15-17).
15.5 Interfaces
15.5.1 Overview
Notice
Inputs X47:1 to 4 are assigned when the manually latched switching device for
authorization is in use.
It cannot be used in this case to scan keys on the extension panel at X47.
Position of
interfaces
E H3 S13
WS1
B S11
F X15 X4
C
X12 X23
X24
X13
L X5 X22
XS12 K
X16
Basic module
X26
X44
X40
X10
X2
X45
X41
PCB_IO
M
X46
C N
X42
X11
X3
X47
X43
X1
Direct keys
X30
X6
G
D
X8
H1
H
H2
E H4
Pin Signal Type Signal name Function
1 OE_S13.x I/O NC contact S13.x
EMERGENCY STOP
2
OE_S13.x I/O Reference potential S13.x
position
11 IR I/O Mode 4
15 ES I/O Mode 3
10 BZ_WS I/O Reference signal
13 IB I/O Mode 2
9 VK I/O Mode 1
Notice
When PLC signals are linked with signals of the individual wiring, note that the
signal change of the individual contacts may take place at different moments.
Simultaneously opening and closing the contacts of a key within the actuating
travel is not possible.
Pin Signal Type Signal name Function
1 BZ_S14 I/O Reference potential NO contact
S14
2
S_S14.1
I/O NO contact S14.1 direction
3
S_S14.2
I/O NO contact S14.2 direction
4
HS 14
I Pilot lamp HS14
Pin
Signal
Type Signal name Function
1
HS 7
I Pilot lamp HS7 All inputs
2
HS 8
I Pilot lamp HS8 High active
3
HS 9
I Pilot lamp HS9
4
HS10
I Pilot lamp HS10
Pin Signal Type Signal name Function
1 OE_S7 I/O NC contact S7
2 OE_S8 I/O NC contact S8
3
OE_S9
I/O NC contact S9
4
OE_S10
I/O NC contact S10
10 BZOE_S7-10 I/O Reference potential NC contacts
S7-10
5
S_S7
I/O NO contact S7
6
S_S8
I/O NO contact S8
7
S_S9
I/O NO contact S9
8
S_S10
I/O NO contact S10
9
BZS_S7-10 I/O Reference potential NO contact
S7-10
11
2P24 V +24V potential
12
Pin Signal Type Signal name Connection Function
XS12 pin
1 KEY 0
I Input 1
2
KEY 1
I Input 2
3 KEY 2 I Input 3 11
Reference potential
4 BZ_KEY I
KEY0...2
5 1M24 V Ground 24V
EMER- S11
2.2
GENCY_STOP
I/O
EMERGENCY
STOP circuit 2
12
EMERGENCY
7 I/O 1
STOP circuit 2.1
8
AUFR_RICHT I/O Direction call
S11
1P24
6 S11
9 ZUST_TA I/O X24:2
(via S11)
10
ZS1/ZS1.1 *) I/O 5
Enabling button
11 ZS2/ZS2.1 *) I/O 14
ZSCommon/
12 I/O 6
ZS2.2 *)
*) two-channel
Pin
Signal
Type Signal name Function
1
BZ_S15
I/O Reference potential NO contact
S15
2 S_S15.1 I/O NO contact S15.1 + direction
3 S_S15.2 I/O NO contact S15.2 + direction
4 HS 15 I Pilot lamp HS15
Connector X10/X11 Connector X10 / X11: Contacts S1 to S6; pilot lamps HS1 to HS6
Connector type X10: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5.08
Connector type X11: 12-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/12-G-5.08
Conn. Pin Signal Type Signal name Function
X10 1 OE_S2 I/O NC contact S2
2 OE_S1 I/O NC contact S1
X11 1 OE_S4 I/O NC contact S4
2 OE_S3 I/O NC contact S3
X10 3 BZOE_S1-4 I/O Reference potential NC con-
4
BZS_S1-S6 I/O
tacts S1 ... S4
Reference potential NO con-
tacts S1... S6
X11 3 S_S4 I/O NO contact S4
4 S_S3 I/O NO contact S3
5 S_S2 I/O NO contact S2
6 S_S1.1 I/O NO contact S1.1
7 BZS_S1.2 I/O Reference potential NO con-
tact S1.2
8
S_S1.2 I/O NO contact S1.2
9
HS 4 I Pilot lamp HS4
10 HS 3 I Pilot lamp HS3 All inputs
High
11 HS 2 I Pilot lamp HS2 active
12 HS 1 I Pilot lamp HS1
Pin
Signal Type Signal name
1
HR_A O Handwheel track A
2
XHR_A O Handwheel track A negated
3
HR_B O Handwheel track B
4
XHR_B O Handwheel track B negated
Pin
Signal Type Signal name Function
1
2
2P24
OE_S11/ZS2.2
V +24V
NC contact S11
S11
*) X4:9
EMERGENCY_ S11
3
STOP 1.1
EMERGENCY STOP
circuit
i it 1
EMERGENCY_
4
STOP 1.2
*) two-channel
Pin
Signal Type Signal name
1
Shield Shield potential
2
M24 V 24V ground
3
P24 V 24V potential
Notice
Use MPI bus connector 6FX2003-0AA02!
Pin Signal Type Signal name
1 NC not connected
2 NC not connected
3 rs I/O RS-485 data
4 ORTSAS O Output Request to Send, user interface
5 GND_EXT V 5V external ground
6 VCC_EXT V 5V external potential
7 NC not connected
8 XRS I/O RS-485 data
9 IRTSPG I/O In Request to Send PG
Pin Signal Type Signal name
1 NC not connected
2 3M24 V Reference potential 24V
3 rs I/O RS-485 data
4
ORTSAS O Output Request to Send, user interface
5
GND_EXT V 5V external ground
7
NC not connected
8
9
XRS
IRTSPG
I/O
I/O
RS-485 data
In Request to Send PG
The power supply potential P24 is not provided by PP 012. An external 24V
power voltage supply enables handheld programming devices 702 and 705 to
be connected. External terminals with a separate 5V power supply cannot be
operated (fiber-optic technology).
Pin
1
Signal
DCD
Type
O
Signal name
Data Carrier Detect
2
RxD I Receive Data RS-232-C
3
TxD O Transmit Data RS-232-C
4 DTR I Data Terminal Ready
5 M V Supply voltage
6 DSR O Data Send Ready
7 RTS I Request To Send
8 CTS O Clear To Send
9 RI I Ring Indicator
Pin Signal
g Type
yp Signal
g name Function
enabling function
EMERGENCY_STOP Emergency Stop NC
1 EMERGENCY STOP
2.1 contact 2.1
2 MPI_A I/O RS-485 data MPI
3 3M24 V 24V ground Su ly
Supply
4 3P24 V +24V voltage
5 ZS1.1 Enabling button
Enabling function
6 ZS2.2 Call enable key
7 HR_B Handwheel B
Handwheel
8 HR_A Handwheel A
EMERGENCY_STOP EMERGENCY STOP
9
1.2 NC contact 1.2
EMERGENCY STOP
EMERGENCY_STOP EMERGENCY STOP
10
1.1 NC contact 1.1
Jumper short-circuit
11 KEY2 I Key scanning No.3
connector
EMERGENCY_STOP EMERGENCY STOP
12 EMERGENCY STOP
2.2 NC contact 2.2
13 MPI_B I/O RS-485 data MPI
14 ZS2.1 Enabling button Enabling function
15 HR_XA Handwheel A negated Handwheel
Not assigned/enab-
16 ZS1.2 N.C./enable key
ling function
17 HR_XB Handwheel B negated Handwheel
Pin
Signal Type Signal name
1
F1 I Direct key 1
2
F2 I Direct key 2
3
3F I Direct key 3
4
5
6
4F
5F
F6
I
I
I
Direct key 4
Direct key 5
Direct key 6
7 F7 I Direct key 7
8 F8 I Direct key 8
9 F9 I Direct key 9
10 F10 I Direct key 10
11 F11 I Direct key 11
12 F12 I Direct key 12
13 F13 I Direct key 13
14 F14 I Direct key 14
15 F15 I Direct key 15
16 F16 I Direct key 16
17
P5 TAC
P5_TAC V 5V keyboard controller
18
19
M TAC
M_TAC V Ground of keyboard controller
20
The direct key module serves to connect the 16 direct keys of the operator
panel.
Pin
1
Signal
P24_5
Type
V
Signal name
24V potential
2 M24 V 24V ground
3 E55/W8 I Input key 55/matrix row 8
1
Pin
Signal
E52/W1
Type
I
Signal name
Input key 52/matrix row 1
2 E53/W2 I Input key 53/matrix row 2
3 E54/W4 I Input key 54/matrix row 4
4 E55/W8 I Input key 55/matrix row 8
5 HS24 O Connection of lamp HS24
6 HS25 O Connection of lamp HS25
7 HS26 O Connection of lamp HS26
8 HS27 O Connection of lamp HS27
Pin Signal Type Signal name
1 W3 I Matrix row 3
2 W5 I Matrix row 5
3 W6 I Matrix row 6
4 W7 I Matrix row 7
5 HS28 O Connection of lamp HS28
6 HS29 O Connection of lamp HS29
7 HS30 O Connection of lamp HS30
8 HS31 O Connection of lamp HS31
Pin
Signal Type Signal name
1
W9 I Matrix row 9
2
W10 I Matrix row 10
3
4
W11
W12
I
I
Matrix row 11
Matrix row 12
Connector X44 Connector type: 3-pin print terminal block MSTBA 2.5/3-G-5.08
Pin Signal Type Signal name
1 Shield I Ground
2 M24 V 24V ground
3 P24 V 24V potential
Pin
1
Signal
P24_5
Type
V
Signal name
24V potential
2 M24 V 24V ground
3 E12/R1 I Input key 12 / matrix line 1
4 E24/R2 I Input key 24 / matrix line 2
Pin
Signal Type Signal name
1
E30/R3 I Input key 30/matrix line 3
2
E61/R4 I Input key 61/matrix line 4
3
4
E62/R5
E63/R6
I
I
Input key 62/matrix line 5
Input key 63/matrix line 6
5 HS16 O Connection of lamp HS16
6 HS17 O Connection of lamp HS17
7 HS18 O Connection of lamp HS18
8 HS19 O Connection of lamp HS19
Pin
1
Signal
E14/R7
Type
I
Signal name
Input key 14/matrix line 7
2
E21/R8 I Input key 21/matrix line 8
3
E22/R9 I Input key 22/matrix line 9
4
5
E23/R10
HS20 O
I Input key 23/matrix line 10
Connection of lamp HS20
6 HS21 O Connection of lamp HS21
7 HS22 O Connection of lamp HS22
8 HS23 O Connection of lamp HS23
Connector parts
for I/O module Table 15-25 Connector parts for I/O module
tor MINI-COMBICON connector part, Article
PCB-IO matrix 3.81 No.
MC 1
1.5/4-ST-3.81
5/4 ST 3 81 Screw 1.5
15 1803594
X40
X40,
FK MCP 1.5/4-ST-3.81
FK-MCP 1 5/4 ST 3 81 Spring
S ring force 1.5
15 1851067
X43
X43,
X45 Housing MCC 1/4-STZ-3,81 Crimp 1852192
contact MCC
MCC-MT
MT 0
0.5...1.0
5 10 Crimp 0
0.5
5 to 1
1.0
0 1859991
MC 1.5/8-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1803633
FRONT-MC 1.5/8-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1850725
X41,
X42, FK-MCP 1.5/8-ST-3.81 Spring force 1.5 1851106
X46
X46, Housing MCC 1/8-STZ-3,81
1/8 STZ 3 81 Crimp
Crim 1852231
X47
Socket connector MCC-MT 0.2...0.35 Crimp 0.2 to 0.35 1859988
contact MCC-MT 0.5...1.0 Crimp 0.5 to 1.0 1859991
tor matrix 5.08 Article
PCB-IO No.
X44 MSTBA 2.5/3-G-5.08 Screw 2.5
1779990
Properties of
jumper S Interlocking of axis motion via the PLC
button S11
S Interlocking of the enable key
S Jumpering of EMERGENCY STOP contacts on the handheld unit
S Manipulation-proof: Sealing cap prevents accidental actuation of key
S Jumper button, non-latching
S Initiation of a monitoring time for checking the operability of the EMER-
GENCY STOP jumpering function
Warning
! It is the users responsibility to ensure that the enable key is designed to DIN
EN 6020411, Subsection 9.2.5.8, and, when released or pushed down, stops
dangerous movements reliably.
When S11 is utilized for the EMERGENCY STOP jumpering function, an inter-
lock of hazardous motions must be implemented via the PLC with S11 and a
time monitor activated simultaneously, in addition to Fig. 15-7. If the signaling
contact on S11:31/32 is not properly closed again on expiry of the monitoring
time (approximately 5 minutes), then EMERGENCY STOP must be generated
by the PLC.
EMERGENCY STOP The EMERGENCY STOP circuit is a two-channel configuration with the follow-
circuits ing layout:
S For circuit 1:
NC contact S13X4:6X5:12XS12:12EMERGENCY STOP handheld
unitXS12:1X5:1X4:7
S For circuit 2:
NC contact S13X24:4X5:9XS12:9EMERGENCY STOP handheld
unitXS12:10X5:10X24:3.
Enable circuit The two-channel variant of the enable function is used for PP 012:
S In addition, the power supply for the handheld units connected at XS12:4 is
interrupted via contact S11:31/32X23:8 and X5:4 when S11 is actuated.
S The interlock between S11 and the enable key must be implemented in the
PLC.
Note
Only 2-channel handheld units can be connected.
The circuit is illustrated in Fig. 15-7 and the terminal assignments in Table 15-26
(see below).
PP 012H X25
EMERGENCY STOP
interf.
2P24
M24
X16
PG
M
M P5
S13
OPI
Filter X15
X13
Repeater
3M24
3P24
13 13
PCB dis 2 2
tributor II 4 4
X22
1 1 3M24 3 3
2 2 1 8 8
3 3 2 15 15
4 4 3 7 7
4 16 17
Jumper 17 16
S11 X23
X23 11 11
2P24 7 32 31 8
5 44 43 6 10 10
4 21 22 3 6 6
1 14 13 2 1 1
14 14
12 12
9 9
5 5
M24 X5
HPU/OPI
/ OP7HH
2P24
X24 X4
EMERGENCY STOP 4 3 2 1 9 6 8 7 1 11 2 12 3 4 5 10
circuit 2
Br5 *)
EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1 Br1
6 14 16 5
Enabling button
Custom-made wiring
1 12 9 10 6 5 14 16 7 15 8 17 11 4 3 2 13
XS12
1 12 9 10 6 5 14 16 4 3 2 13
HT6
Handheld terminal
HT6 MPI
6FC5 403-0AA10-0AA0
EMERGENCY STOP Power
supply
Enabling button 11 4
1 12 9 10
Terminator
Terminator
(component PP 012H) 3P24
1
EMERGENCY_
STOP 2.1
EMERGENCY STOP
button 2.1
EMERGENCY STOP
button 2.1
Br1
2
3
MPI_A
3M24
MPI_A
M
MPI_A
M
4 3P24 P24 P24 BR3
5 ZS1.1 ZS1.1 ZS1.1
6 ZS2.2 ZS2.2 ZS2.2
7 HR_B HRB
8 HR_A HRA
9 EMERGENCY_ EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP Br2
STOP 1.2 button 1.2 button 1.2
10 EMERGENCY_ EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP Br2
STOP 1.1 button 1.1 button 1.1
11 KEY2 KEY2 KEY2 BR3
12 EMERGENCY_ EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP Br1
STOP 2.2 button 2.2 button 2.2
13 MPI_B MPI_B MPI_B
14 ZS2.1 ZS2.1 ZS2.1
15 HR_XA HR_XA
16 ZS1.2 ZS1.2 ZS1.2
17 HR_XB HR_XB
Dimension
drawing
482.6
155
444
105
50
70
132,5 132,5
451+1
B B
137.6+1
155
482.6
35
Mounting The PP012 (dimensions, see Fig. 15-9) is fastened by means of tension jacks
preparations (included in the scope of supply) at the rear side of the operator panel. Due to
the surrounding seal located on the rear side, the frame profile complies with
degree of protection IP65 when all 9 tension jacks are fastened.
Only IP54 can be achieved for the complete pushbutton panel, however, due to
the installation of a keyswitch.
If necessary, the tension jacks (9 items) can be supplied as a spare part (Order
No. 6FC5 248-0AF13-0AA0).
Connecting The 24V power supply is connected via a 3-way terminal block (see Fig. 15-6)
24V power supply to connector X8 on the rear side of the machine control panel. The equipotential
bonding conductor is fastened using an M5 screw and must be linked with the
central ground standard part.
Danger
! The 24VDC power supply must always be grounded and be designed as
Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) protection by function low volt-
age with safe isolation!
Connecting The PP 012 is connected to the 840D or S7-300 control by means of an MPI
MPI connection bus line. The MPI connector is plugged into X15 on the rear of the PP 012 and
fixed with a screw.
Connecting Emergency stop, selector switch and single contacts are connected according
individual wiring to the required custom-made links.
(For function see Figs. 15-17 to 15-21)
Supply voltages for inputs and outputs must always be grounded!
Note
To use the actuating element WS1 as a mode selector switch a keyswitch
CG4-1A251-600 *FS1 V750D/2J must be installed in accordance with EU
Directive 89/392/EEC.
Device front
80 90
70 100
110
power 60 WS3
0 120
WS1 PG interface
COM
40 6070
20 80
10 90
6 100
WS2 110
2
0 120
Free layout of labeling areas thanks to the use of slide-in user labels
Dimensions for The following drawing is intended purely as an example; multiple slide-in labels
labeling the can also be arranged.
slide-in labels
Window area bordering
Cutting edge bordering
Corners rounded R1.5
or chamfered 1.5x45
5 5
must not be printed
must be printed
110
85.5
76.5
1
10 64.5
180 55.5
(Designation field, WS1)
7 7
146
(variable switching elements S1 to S4; S7 to S10; S14; S15)
21.5
38
113 0
Dimensions for labeling the slide-in user labels
16
1
80 19
0
slide-in labels (S11, XS12)
14.4
Dimensions for labeling
47
16
56.4
23.8
14
0 85
1
19
Labeling
on the rear side of
the device
S11
2P24
*HR-B
HR-B
*HR-A
HR-A
HS7
2 1
HS8
S1
X43
S2 HS9
X44 3
HS10
1
HS1
1
8
HS2 S7
X45
HS3 S8
X41
HS4 S9
WS1 S11
4
S10
1
8 1
S1 S7
S1 S8
X46
S2 S9
X42
S3 S10
8
S4
S3
1
4 1
Board INPUT/OUTPUT
S4 2P24
S1 S7
X47
HS1 HS7
X43
8
1
S2 S8
Option
Option
HS2 HS8
S3 S9
HS3 HS9
HS14
S14 S15
S14 S15
S4 S10
HS4 HS10 HS15
S14 S15
HS14 HS15
1.6AT
X30
WS3 WS2
HW FAULT S7-300(2)
>
S7-300
BUS
Request 840 D
4321 ON
4321 4 3 21
OFF
S18 S16 S17
95
64 33
482.6
A-A
Center
70
26.6
25.5
38
10
21
42.2
Panel cutout
B B
132,5 132,5
77.6+1
95
34.2 123,5 155.8 103.3 34.2
451+1
35
482.6
Max. torque
B-B 0.5Nm
Dimensions for The following drawing is intended purely as an example; multiple slide-in labels
labeling the can also be arranged.
slide-in labels
1
23.8
Cutting edge bordering
must be printed
16.1
20
112
145
178
0
46
79
208
Slide-in direction
23.8 1
16.1
20
112
13
178
145
235
0
79
46
Slide-in direction
Fig. 15-15 Dimensions for texts on the slide-in labels (PP 012 extension)
15.11.1 Inputs/outputs
Inputs
Table 15-27 Inputs (possible combinations)
tacts tacts
1 without 14 contacts 14 without 10 contacts
2 7 keys 11 contacts 15 7 keys 7 contacts
3 12 keys 10 contacts 16 12 keys 6 contacts
4 14 keys 9 contacts 17 14 keys 5 contacts
5 24 keys 8 contacts 18 24 keys 4 contacts
6 36 keys 7 contacts 19 36 keys 3 contacts
7 48 keys 6 contacts 20 48 keys 2 contacts
8 60 keys 5 contacts 21 60 keys 1 contact
9 72 keys 4 contacts 22 72 keys 0 contacts
10 84 keys 3 contacts
Functions of keys in the matrix:
11 96 keys 2 contacts
+ Non-latching key
12 108 keys 1 contact + Single-key actuation
+ No switch function
13 120 keys 0 contacts
Key matrix Eight inputs W3, W5, W6, W7, W9, W10, W11, W12 for matrix.
option Four outputs A28 to A31 for driving lamps.
Matrix keyboard
scan
Number No
of active blocks
= 1?
Yes
Save the active
block Rn
Scan inputs
W1, W2, W4, W8
Parity No
OK?
Yes
Save RnWn
Bounce suppression
function
Custom-made There are various possible applications for connecting the key inputs KEY0 to
wiring KEY2:
1. Enable key connection according to Fig. 15-7
2. Use as isolated inputs with reference potential at X4/5
3. Use of button S11 with PLC function without jumpering.
For the required jumper assignment and their meaning, please refer to the
Tables below.
Br1 Br5
Use of the connections X4:1;2;3 as isolated inputs. The refer-
ence potential is at X4:4 here.
X X PLC function
Use of
connections Table 15-30 Use of the connections
Potential Port Use
X3/11,12 Control of inputs HS1 to HS4, HS7 to HS10, HS14 and HS15
2P24
X24/1 Controlling the inputs KEY 0 to KEY 2
KEY0...2
X4/1 ... 3
Inputs KEY0 to KEY2
Reference potential of inputs KEY 0 to KEY 2;
M24 X4/5
no external use.
S11
2P24 X5
2P24
2P24 M24
X24 1) X4
4321 9 6 5 10 7 4 12 11 8 1 2 3 X3
11 12
Br1 Br52)
External contacts
1) S11 connection with single-channel variant only
2) Signal to PLC: Triggers a monitoring timer.
If the signal level is still low or open when the monitoring time has expired (approximately
5min.), the PLC must initiate an EMERGENCY STOP (see also Fig. 15-7).
Ext. control of
pilot lamps
HS1 ... HS10
Block Sn
HSn 2P24
1M24
External contact
Circuit for
EMERGENCY
STOP button
1 1 1 1 3
EMER- to PLC
GENCY
STOP button 2 2 2 2 4
optional
Connection of
spindle speed
override WS3 X18.1 WS3 6FC5 247-0AA34-0AA1
rd
C
16
rd
8
X18.2
Fig. 15-20 Connection WS3 spindle speed override spindle speed/rapid traverse
X30
20
19
18
17
16 F16
15 F15
14 F14
13 F13
12 F12
PCB direct keys
PP 012 11 F11
10 F10
9 F9 +
8 F8
5V +
10 %
7 F7
6 F6
5 5F
4 4F
3 3F
2 2F
1 F1
Extension panel
Single contacts
connection W8
Lamps
SE11 SE12 SE13 SE14
W4 HS27
W1; W2; W4; W8
only as an alternative HS26
to the key matrix, W2
HS25
X42, X43
Unassigned W1 HS24
R10*) HS23
X43
R6 HS19
X47
R3
card 12E/12A
X46
HS16
X41
P24_5
M24
X45 R2
SE1 SE2
R1
X40
M24
X44
P24
Row n=2
Group
Group
Group
M24
SMn
SM2
SM1
W12
W11
W10
W9
Lamps
HS31
W7
HS30
HS29 W6
HS28
SMn.6
SM2.6
SM1.4 SM1.5 SM1.6
W5
When these are connected, the
SMn.3 SMn.4 SMn.5
SM2.4 SM2.5
W4
W3
Inputs R1 to R10
SM1.1 SM1.2 SM1.3
SM2.3
W2
SMn.1 SMn.2
SM2.1 SM2.2
W1
Fig. 15-22 Connecting the extension panel to PCB expansion card 12E/12A
Wiring
example P24_5 * switch
Not usable
is used
Individual M24 Authorization
X45
keys switch is used
X47
R8 *
E21*
R7 *
E14*
X46
R4
E61
R3
E30
SE2
R2
E24
X45
SE1
R1
E12
SM1.7 SM1.6 SM1.5 SM1.4 SM1.3 SM1.2 SM1.1
(W1)
E52
(W2)
E53
(W3)
(W4)
E54
(W5)
(W6)
Inputs PLC
(W7)
Group
X41, X42
SM1
SEW8
(W8)
E55
(W9)
nc
nc = not connected
(W10)
nc nc
(W11)
X43
(W12)
nc
(W8)
P24_5 PB
E19
M24 (even)
X40
X44 1 3 2
from central
power M24
supply P24
Fig. 15-23 Wiring example eleven single keys and seven matrix keys
15.13.1 PP 012
Electrical data
Total current Rated volts. Voltage up- Voltage Fuse
per limit lower limit
max. 1A 24VDC 30.2VDC 18.5VDC 1.6AT
Mechanical data
Dimensions Height Width Mounting Depth to the
depth front
155mm 483mm 105mm 70mm
Environmental conditions
Installed/in operation Storage/transport
Front Rear side
Temperature ranges 0 ... 45C 0 ... 55C 40 ... 70C
Degree of protection IP 54 IP 10A
Degree of protection I to IEC 204 I
Key contact maker Contacts with floating outputs S1 to S4; S7 to S10; S11; S14; S15 (NC contact
or NO contact)
AC DC
Nominal insulation voltage Ue 50V 50V
Nominal operating current Ie 2A
Rated operating current at 24V Ie 2A
Min. rated operating current at 5V Imin 10mA
Volume resistance < 20m
Switching capacity 10Ie 1.1le
Max. operating current for reference po- 8A 8A
tential
Nominal operating voltage
Load
Ue
AC
300V
DC
300V
resistive 10A
Switching capacity
inductive > 2A
resistive 10A
Switching capacity at 24V
inductive 6A
Nominal values for arc-
0.3A 0.22A
free switching at 24V
Utilization category AC DC
(EN 60947-5-1)
Rated operating voltage Ue 24V 24V
AC-12 le 10A
AC-15 le 6A
Switching capacity
DC-12 le 10A
DC-13 le 3A
Min. rated operating current at lmin 1mA
5V
For further parameters, see pushbutton and indicator light SIGNUM 3SB3
Status Voltage Current switched
switched
Nominal value 24V
H signal
Min. 4mA (at 15V)
Signal level +15V to +30V
Max. 9.5mA (at 30V)
L signal
Nominal value
Signal level
0V or open
3V to +5V
In a group of 3
Max. 50m
Cable length
AWG 2016
Status
Nominal value
Voltage switched
24V
Current switched
50mA
Pilot lamp ON (making current
Signal level +18V to +30V max. 600mA)
Pilot lamp OFF
Nominal value open
Cable length
Max. 10 m AWG 2016
X30
Status
Voltage switched Current switched
Nominal value 5V
H signal
Signal level +5V or open
Nominal value
L signal
Signal level 3V to +1V < 11mA
In a group of 16
Cable length Max 0.6m AWG 28
Power supply
Total current Rated voltage Voltage up- Voltage Fuse
per limit lower limit
Max. = 5A, depend-
24VDC 30.2VDC 18.5VDC 2x10A
ing on the lamp load
Inputs X41, X42, X43, X45, X46, X47: E12, E14, E21 to E24, E30, E52 to E55, E61 to
E63, W1 to W12
Status Voltage switched Current switched
Nominal value +24V
H signal Min. 3.6mA (at 15V)
Signal level +15V to +30V
Max. 8mA (at 30V)
Nominal value 0V or open
L signal
Signal level 3V to +5V
In a group of
Cable length common root
Max. 50m, AWG 16
Status
Nominal value
Voltage switched
+24V
Current switched
H signal
Signal level +20V to +30V Max. 0.5A/output
Nominal value
L signal
Signal level open < 25A
In a group of 16
Cable length Max. 50m, AWG 16
Output
Max. of 5A
total current
Status
Voltage switched Current switched
Output total current
Nominal value +24V
Max. of 700mA
Word 0 + direction I/O direction Variable keys
High
S15 E14/R7 S14 E12/R1 S4 S3 S2 S1
Key
switch 0
Word 1 I/O GD project Version activation GD project
Low
E23/R10 E22/R9 E21/R8 DIP E19/PB High *) DIP DIP
key Key Key S18/3 (parity) (reserve) S16/1 S18/4
switch 3 switch S2 switch 1
Word 1 GD project I/O EMER- Variable keys
High GENCY
STOP
*) DIP E30/R3 S13 S10 S9 S8 S7 E24/R2
S16/1
Word 2 Direct keys
Low
F8 F7 F6 5F 4F 3F F2 F1
Word 2 Direct keys
High
GD project
F16 F15 F14 F13 F12 F11 F10 F9
Word 3 I/O Spindle speed/rapid traverse
Low
E55/W8 E54/W4 E53/W2 E52/W1 D C B A
Word 3 I/O Feed override
High
E63/R6 E62/R5 E61/R4 E D C B A
*) All bits identified with DIP-S16/1 are simultaneously switched when S16/1 is actuated.
Legend:
High active signals S1 ... S4; High active/Low active settable via S18.2
S7... S10; S18.2 closed = Low active
S14;
S15
S18.2 open = High active
Low active signals Ex/HSx I/O high active via a plug-on card supplied as
an option
Word 2 Unassigned
High
Word 3 Unassigned
Lo
Low
Word 3 Unassigned
High
Notice
When the mode is switched over, Low can be output briefly for all signals on
selector switch SW1!
I.e., all safety-relevant signals are linked such that they are only possible if
switch WS1 has a defined position.
15.15 Initialization
Assignments The following settings are possible with the switches DIP S16, S17, S18:
DIP switch
settings Table 15-45 Default setting for 840D
Application:
Connecting the PP 012 to an 840D
S17 S16 S18
Meaning
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
X off on off on on off off off off X off 187.5 kbaud/1.5 Mbaud
Transmission cycle time
100 msecs, bus address 6
Set of parameters 1
Prerequisite:
none, can be directly connected to the MPI/OPI of the 840D
Application:
Connecting the PP 012 to an S7300
S17 S16 S18
Meaning
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
off off on off on on off on off off X off 187.5 kbaud
Transmission cycle time
100 msecs bus address 6
Set of parameters 2
Prerequisite:
A global data table created using HISTEP
Table 15-47 Setting for S7-300 with two machine control panels
Application:
Connecting two PP 012s to an S7300
S17 S16 S18
Meaning
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
off off on off on on off on off on X off 187.5 kbaud
Transmission cycle time
100 msecs, bus address 6
Set of parameters 3
Prerequisite:
A global data table created using HISTEP
Settings of The load on the PLC by the PP 012 can thus be adapted.
transmission
cycle time The PLC expects a message frame from the PP 012 at least every 500 msecs.
The PP 012 sends a message frame to the PLC at cyclic intervals when no key
is pressed. This cycle time is set on S17 DIP switches 2 and 3.
Communication The switchover of the sets of parameters (GD identifications) for communication
parameters between control system and PP 012 is carried out using the DIP switches S16/1
or S18/3.
The switchover will only come into effect after power ON on PP 012.
ters 1 ters 2 ters 3
1
Receive GD circuit no. 1 2
2 Receive GBZ no. 1 1
3 Object no. for receive GBZ Internal 1 1
Assign-
4 Send GD circuit no. ment 1 2
5 Send GBZ no. 2 2
6 Object no. for send GBZ 1 1
Global data table When the PP 012 is operated in conjunction with an S7-300 CPU, set of param-
eters 2 is selected and a global data table is created using HISTEP.
In this case, communication with the PP 012 must be configured as follows:
GD identification ebf/s7-300:: ebf/PP 012::
GD 1.1.1 >>ab60:8 eb0:8
GD 1.2.1 eb60:8 >>ab0:8
The specifications ab60 and eb60 for S7 are only examples; the signals can
also be transferred to other locations.
The GD identification is generated by the compiler.
GD 1.1.1 PP 012 is receiver
GD 1.2.1 PP 012 is transmitter
This assignment corresponds to set of parameters 2 as per Table 15-48.
Note
Make sure that a data width of eight bytes is always assigned for the input and
output image!
GD 1.1.1
GD identification ebf/s7-300::
>>ab60:8
ebf/PP 012::
eb0:8
ebf/PP 012_2::
GD 1.2.1
GD 2.1.1
eb60:8
>>ab120:8
>>ab0:8
eb0:8
GD 2.2.1
eb118:8 >>ab0:8
Danger
! The transmission path (MPI/OPI) from PP 012 to the central controller must be
monitored by the user.
Note
Monitoring of the MPI link between SIMATIC S7 and PP 012 can be imple-
mented with the global data bit, bit 31. The user can reset bit 31 and provide it
with a watchdog. If this bit is not set again within the predefined time interval, a
fault in the line is the cause.
Lamp replacement 1. Prize off the button cap towards the front with a screwdriver.
for illuminated
2. Lever out the button holder using lamp remover LZ5.
keys, illuminated
switches 3. Change the lamp using service tool LZ5 or a suitable insulating tube.
4. Refit the button holder and cap in reverse order.
Note
Lamp remover LZ5 is not a SIEMENS product. It can be obtained from the
Schlegel company.
Changing the 1. Prize off the cap and the label holder towards the front with a screwdriver.
lamps on pilot 2. Use the lamp remover of service tool LZ5 or a suitable insulating tube to
lamps change the lamp.
3. Refit the cap and the label holder.
Notice
When using LEDs, make sure that they are connected with the correct polarity
(see Fig. 15-8: dimension drawing of PP 012) !
Insert slide-in
labels 1. Create the slide-in labels (see Fig. 15-10).
2. Remove the protective film from the label slot.
3. Slide in the labels (with print facing the operator side).
4. Align the texts in the window.
Note
Slide in the labels when the PP 012 operator panel front is not yet installed.
Changing a 1. Loosen the cap nut on the pushbutton until the contact maker has almost
contact maker been reached.
2. Pull the pushbutton and the contact maker approximately 3mm out of the
fixture (the locating pin of the pushbutton must be freed).
3. Turn the pushbutton approx. 20 to the right or left, remove it from the con-
tact maker and remove the cap nut.
4. Change the contact element, remove the defective contact maker from the
fixture and press the new contact maker down into the fixture.
5. Insert the pushbutton into the opening and screw on the cap nut partially.
6. Press the pushbutton down until it rests on the contact maker. When doing
so, observe the position of the locking lose.
7. Screw the cap nut tight (max. torque 0.8Nm).
15.18 Configuring
15.18.1 Delivery variants
Note
When replacing the existing PP 031 devices with variants of the PP 012, down-
wards compatibility cannot always be guaranteed!
PP 012H 6 F C 5 2 0 3 0 A F 2 5 1 A A 0
as the base unit, in addition, with 17-pin hand-
held
unit socket connector and jumper button with
repeater function and distributor,
two-channel enabling function
PP 012/S 6 F C 5 2 0 3 0 A F 2 6 0 A A 0
Special version based on PP 012; Z
the assembly is identified clearly by a
Z option specification
PP 012H/S 6 F C 5 2 0 3 0 A F 2 7 1 A A 0
Special version based on PP 012H; Z
the assembly is identified clearly by a
Z option specification,
two-channel enabling function
1) When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding functionality,
observe the standard EN 60204 Part1 or VDE 0113 Part1, Section Pushbuttons/Colors.
Extensions to the PP 012 (can be ordered and installed by the customer separately)
Override switch, 16-level speed 6 F C 5 2 4 7 0 A A 3 4
0 A A 1
+/ keys raised 6 F C 5 2 4 7 0 A A 4 1
0 A A 0
PCB expansion card 12E/12A 6 F C 5 2 4 7 0 A A 4 2
0 A A 0
Extension panel with 12 slots 6 F C 5 2 4 7 0 A A 4 3
1 A A 0
2xNC contacts for Emergency Stop buttons 3 S B 3 4 0 0 0 E
Spare parts kit PP 031MC 6 F C 5 2 4 7 0 A A 2 7
5 covers, 5 films, 2 sealing caps, set of button 0 A A 0
caps, 5 incandescent lamps with base,
1 dummy plug, 1 illuminated key contact
maker,
1 printed drawing A5E00122711A-A1
1) When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding functionality,
observe the standard EN 60204 Part1 or VDE 0113 Part1, Section Pushbuttons/Colors.
Actuator/accessories Switching element/ ing
Pilot lamp location
Pilot lamp
Lamp nipple
28mm
RXJN-GB (yellow)
Lamp socket AL5 with
incandescent lamp
T5.5K/30
S1 ... S4
S7 ...
S10
Lamp
RXJN-GN (green) or spot LED L5.5K28UG S14,
RXJN-RT (red) (green) L5.5K28UR S15
RXJN-BL (blue) (red) L5.5K28UW
RXJN-KL (transp. (white) L5.5K28UY (am-
ber)
glass)
RXJN-WS (white) L5.5K28UB (blue)
Buttons
Pushbutton 28mm Button contact maker S11
RXJT-GB (yellow) AT2 1 NC contact (internal), 2 NO
RXJT-GN (green) contact + 1 NC contact (ext.)
RXJT-RT (red) For S1 1 NC contact (inter-
RXJT-BL (blue) nal), 2 NO contact + 1 NC
RXJT-KL (transparent contact (external)
glass) For S2...S4, S7...S10 1 NC
RXJT-GSW (black) contact (int.), 1 NO contact +
1 NC contact (external)
For S14, S15 1 NC contact
int., 2 NO contacts ext.
Illuminated keys
Pushbutton 28mm Illuminated key contact For S1 1 NC contact (inter-
with fixture for T5.5K RXJT-GB (yellow) maker ATL2 with incan- nal), 2 NO contact + 1 NC
RXJT-GN (green) descent lamp T5.5K/30 contact (external)
RXJT-RT (red) or spot LED For S...S4, S7...S10 1 NC
RXJT-BL (blue) L5,5K28UG (green) contact (internal), 1 NO con-
RXJT-KL (transparent L5.5K28UR (red) tact + 1 NC contact (ext.)
glass) L5.5K28UW (white) For S14, S15 1 NC contact
L5.5K28UY (yellow) (internal), 2 NO contacts (ext.)
L5.5K28UB (blue) Lamp externally controllable
Keyswitch
Safety lock cylinder Button contact maker For S1 1 NC contact (int.), 2
Switching angle 900 28mm AT2 NO cont. + 1 NC cont. (ext.)
2 position keys, re- RXJSSA 15 E For S1...S4, S7...S10
movable in both posi- 1 NC contact (internal), 1 NO
tions contact + 1 NC contact (exter-
nal) S14, S15 1 NC contact
(internal), 2 NO contacts (ext.)
Raised keys 6FC5 2 RTAO pushbuttons 2 AT2
247-0AA41-0AA0 with plunger elong. Special design
Designation field
Replaceable text insert
strips
Dummy plug BVR22 S14 and S15 with base unit
Selector switch Knob FS1 WS1 Re-equipping to knob-oper-
ated switch
Speed/rapid 6FC5 247-0AA34-0AA1 WS3 Connection to PCB PP 031R
traverse override
EMERGENCY Switching
g element: 2 3SB3400-0E Expans. NC contact EMER-
NC contacts
t t S13 GENCY STOP
STOP
Note
When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding func-
tionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part1 or VDE 0113 Part1, Section
Pushbuttons/Colors.
One of the following rating plates is attached to the components and modules:
Components Example:
F2 L3
A5E00112382 A/B
6FC5 2030AF0AA0
PP012
In case of technical queries or service, please quote all data on the rating plate
to the local SIEMENS office responsible for your equipment.
J
Notes
16.1.1 Introduction
Key- NC-CPU
board
con-
troller
COM PLC
COM MPI
OPI/MPI
HT6
HPU
HHU
Programming device (PG)
Customer control panel
Application Machine control panel for machine tools in conjunction with the control systems
810D, 840D, STEP7 300 and FM NC.
Communication The p.c. board is connected to the control system via the MPI interface.
MPI/OPI The PP 031 MC is connected to the appropriate control system via the MPI/OPI
interface interface. DIP switches allow you to select a parameter set from three possible
variants (see Tables 16-49 to 16-51).
PG interface Data and control signals correspond to the OPI. Handheld programming de-
vices require an external 24V power supply for operation.
The interface is not supplied with an external 5V potential (P5.EXT).
COM interface Carries the signals from the COM interface of the A&D-PC to the PP 031 MC.
Inputs/outputs in 60 inputs and 26 outputs are assigned functions by the PP 031 MC. The trans-
control system mission is word by word.
Inputs for The printed circuit board has three isolated inputs.
custom-made
wiring
EMERGENCY When actuated, the EMERGENCY STOP chain will ensure your own personal
STOP chain safety, as well as to protect the product in case of danger. The EMERGENCY
STOP chain is also active when the handheld units are removed. The Emer-
gency Stop button can be jumpered on the handheld unit by pressing S11 when
the handheld unit is plugged/removed.
This is necessary to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP chain from being inter-
rupted.
Note
To effectively deal with any malfunction by the jumpering key S11 (e.g. jam-
ming), the user PLC program must generate EMERGENCY STOP when a
monitoring time (approximately 5 min.) expires (see Figs. 16-7 and 16-17).
Actuating The actuating elements S1 to S4, S7 to S10, S14 and S15 are connected to the
elements control system via the MPI/OPI. In addition, they have isolated contacts (com-
mon root) for custom-made wiring.
Lamps The lamps HS1 to HS4, HS7 to HS10, HS14 and HS15 are connected to the
control system via MPI/OPI. Alternatively, they can also be controlled from ex-
ternal non-isolated contacts.
EMERGENCY are also connected to the control system via MPI/OPI and have isolated con-
STOP and tacts for custom-made wiring.
mode selector
switches
Function blocks
PP 031 MC S Interface/CPU/monitoring
S Distributor with repeater
S Handheld unit connection XS12
S I/O connection X20, X21
S Direct control key connection X19
S Interconnecting cable COM X26
S 4-stage mode selector switch WS1
S Feed override WS2
S Speed/rapid traverse override WS3
S Max. 12 control devices, one of them an Emergency Stop button S13 and a
jumper button S11
S Max. 10 pilot lamps that can be controlled either from PLC or externally
S Inputs for configuring global data (GD) (DIP switches)
S Isolated operator panel front interface X15 with additional programming de-
vice interface X16
S DIP switches for generating S16, S17, S18 (baud rate, node address)
S Power supply.
Function blocks
PCB input/output S 16 isolated outputs for controlling lamps, four of them optional (key matrix
option)
S 14 isolated inputs for scanning individual keys/switches
S Key matrix option up to 120 keys can be scanned
S Short-circuit-proof 24V output for external keys
S Matrix keys momentary-contact.
Function blocks
PCB direct keys S 16 isolated inputs for scanning the direct keys from the A&D control panel.
Fig. 16-2
16.3
I/O (option) Direct keys COM
10.00
1 Conn-
F1 Authorization ection
X21 X20 X19 X27 WS4
3 1P24 key-operated X26 to
Filter 1M24 A&D PC
2 D0 ... D15 16 VCC GND GND 16 GND switch
GND SB VCC GND
2P24 60
Block diagram of PP 031 MC; /HR; -S
X8
Block diagrams
X18.1
Operating modes 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 5 6 GND
X12 power MPI 10 Speed C
51
9 WS1 5 GND 4
Block S1/HS1
ON MPI /
6 52
13 Test Rapid 16
10 7 50
Blocks S2/HS2
Blocks S3/HS3
Blocks S4/HS4
Blocks S7/HS7
Blocks S8/HS8
Blocks S9/HS9
Blocks S10/HS10
Blocks S14/HS14
Blocks S15/HS15
15 8 X13 X14 traverse 8
Conn.
11 Override
2
GND 1) X18.2
WS3
30 49
1 2 3 1
PG
50
EMERGENCY STOP 52
GND X25 HS1
S13
PG
interf.
2P24
GND
X16
M24
1M24
GND
VCC
GND
X13 C
4 59
OPI
X11 4 4 Feed
Filter X15 16 61
78 12 11 10 9 1 2 X2 3 4 X1 X6 override 8 60
WS2 2 58
1) 57
3M24
3P24
Repeater 4 18 3221 17 Switch 1
GD project S18.2
S18.3
X17
S16.1
S18.4
13 =1
2
EMERGENCY STOP circuit1
EMERGENCY STOP circuit2
1 8 9 10 11 12 26 27 28 29 14 16
2 15
3 7
4 16 17
Jumper S1 S2
Block S14
16
Block S7
Block S8
Block S9
Block S10
Block S4
Block S3
Block S15
X23 S11 X23 11
Block S2
Block S1
P24 7 32 31 8
5 44 43 6 10 ()
6
GND
GND
4 21 22 3 (+)
1 14 13 2 1 GND
14
12
HPU/OPI
2P24
5 X1
2 4 X10 3 1 3 21
M24 X5
2P24
X24 X4
4 3 2 1
8 9 6
7 11 1 2 12 3 4 5 10 XS12 5 1 6 7 11 12 X6
X11 6 5 4 2 3 1 10 9 2 X3 3 8 4 3 21
16-337
Br1
Custom-made PCB HPU
wiring
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components Manual (BH) 11.02 Edition
Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved
10.00
4
X40
3
GND
2
M24 (even)
1
PB
VCC
key matrix
4
W12
M Ext.
Option
X43
X19
3
W11
19 20
2
W10
1
W9
16
Block F16
7 8
HS31 F16
X42
15
Block (HS28...HS31) HS30 Block F15
6
4
W7 HS29 F15
14
5
HS28 Block F14
3
W6 F14
X42
13
(PB) Block F13
2
W5 F13
7 8
Block E19 E19 HS27
12
Block F12
X41
1
11
Lock by HS25 Block F11 F11
5
manually latched switching device for authorization HS24
10
Block F10
4
8
W4 E54 HS23 F9
X47
7
2
8
E53 Block F8 F8
6
1
7
GND HS20 Block F7 F7
4
Block E23
16 Operator Component PP 031 MC
R10 E23
Block F6
6
X47
VCC
3
5
2
X21
Block E14
4
R7 E14 Block F4
D(15:0) 4F
24 V/0.5A
Block E63
4
6 7 8
E63 HS19
3
R6
X46
Block F3
X46
Block E62 3F
3
E62 HS18
Memory
R5
2
Block E61 GND HS17 Block F2
2
2F
16.3 Block diagrams
R4 E61
X30
HS16
1
1
R2 E24
X45
Block E12
2
F1
17 18
M24 WDR1
3
R1
10A
E12
1
1
F1
X44
M24
2
10A
M24
16-338
Fig. 16-4
Fig. 16-3
2F
I<0.7A
3
P24_5 P24
10.00 16 Operator Component PP 031 MC
16.4 Control elements
Position of control
elements LOGO S1
HS1
S2
HS2
S3
HS3
S4
HS4
S14
HS14 70
80 90
100
110
power 60
0 120
L A B C D E K F G H IL
Machine Manufacturer
For further or different reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP:
See machine tool manufacturers instructions!
Power S Display of power supply, lights green when controller operating voltage >
4.7V
Notice
When used as a mode selector switch, the keyswitch should be used accord-
ing to Guideline 89/392/EWG.
Variably fitted S In the slots S1 to S4, S7 to S10, S14 and S15, control devices can be
actuating elements installed as per Table 16-55.
S To effectively deal with any malfunction by the jumpering key S11 (e.g. jam-
ming), the user PLC program must generate EMERGENCY STOP when a
monitoring time (approximately 5 min.) expires (see Figs. 16-7 and 16-17).
16.5 Interfaces
16.5.1 Overview
Notice
Inputs X47:1 to 4 are assigned when the manually latched switching device for
authorization is in use.
It cannot be used in this case to scan keys on the customer control panel at
X47.
Position of
interfaces
E H3 S13
WS1
B S11
F X15 X4
C
X12 X23
X24
X13
L X5 X22
XS12 K
X16
Basic module
X26
X44
X40
X10
X2
X45
X41
PCB_IO
M
X46
C N
X42
X11
X3
X47
X43
X1
Direct keys
X30
X6
G
D
X8
H1
H
H2
E H4
Pin Signal Type Signal name Function
1 OE_S13.x I/O NC contact S13.x
EMERGENCY STOP
2
OE_S13.x I/O Reference potential S13.x
position
11 IR I/O Mode 4
15 ES I/O Mode 3
10 BZ_WS I/O Reference signal
13 IB I/O Mode 2
9 VK I/O Mode 1
Notice
When PLC signals are linked with signals of the individual wiring, note that the
signal change of the individual contacts may take place at different moments.
Simultaneously opening and closing the contacts of a key within the actuating
travel is not possible.
Pin Signal Type Signal name Function
1 BZ_S14 I/O Reference potential NO contact
S14
2
S_S14.1
I/O NO contact S14.1 direction
3
S_S14.2
I/O NO contact S14.2 direction
4
HS 14
I Pilot lamp HS14
Pin
Signal
Type Signal name Function
1
HS 7
I Pilot lamp HS7 All inputs
2
HS 8
I Pilot lamp HS8 High active
3
HS 9
I Pilot lamp HS9
4
HS10
I Pilot lamp HS10
Pin Signal Type Signal name Function
1 OE_S7 I/O NC contact S7
2 OE_S8 I/O NC contact S8
3
OE_S9
I/O NC contact S9
4
OE_S10
I/O NC contact S10
10 BZOE_S7-10 I/O Reference potential NC contacts
S7-10
5
S_S7
I/O NO contact S7
6
S_S8
I/O NO contact S8
7
S_S9
I/O NO contact S9
8
S_S10
I/O NO contact S10
9
BZS_S7-10 I/O Reference potential NO contact
S7-10
11
2P24 V +24V potential
12
Pin Signal Type Signal name Connection Function
XS12 pin
1 KEY 0
I Input 1
2
KEY 1
I Input 2
3 KEY 2 I Input 3 11
Reference potential
4 BZ_KEY I
KEY0...2
5 1M24 V Ground 24V
EMER- S11
2.2
GENCY_STOP
I/O
EMERGENCY
STOP circuit 2
12
EMERGENCY
7 I/O 1
STOP circuit 2.1
8
AUFR_RICHT I/O Direction call
S11
1P24
6 S11
9 ZUST_TA I/O X24:2
(via S11)
10
ZS1/ZS1.1 *) I/O 5
Enabling button
11 ZS2/ZS2.1 *) I/O 14
ZSCommon/
12 I/O 6
ZS2.2 *)
*) two-channel
Pin
Signal
Type Signal name Function
1
BZ_S15
I/O Reference potential NO contact
S15
2 S_S15.1 I/O NO contact S15.1 + direction
3 S_S15.2 I/O NO contact S15.2 + direction
4 HS 15 I Pilot lamp HS15
Connector X10/X11 Connector X10 / X11: Contacts S1 to S6; pilot lamps HS1 to HS6
Connector type X10: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5.08
Connector type X11: 12-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/12-G-5.08
Conn. Pin Signal Type Signal name Function
X10 1 OE_S2 I/O NC contact S2
2 OE_S1 I/O NC contact S1
3 BZOE_S1-4 I/O Reference potential NC con-
tacts S1 ... S4
4
BZS_S1-S6 I/O Reference potential NO con-
tacts S1... S6
X11 1 OE_S4 I/O NC contact S4
2 OE_S3 I/O NC contact S3
3 S_S4 I/O NO contact S4
4 S_S3 I/O NO contact S3
5 S_S2 I/O NO contact S2
6 S_S1.1 I/O NO contact S1.1
7 BZS_S1.2 I/O Reference potential NO con-
tact S1.2
8
S_S1.2 I/O NO contact S1.2
9
HS 4 I Pilot lamp HS4
10 HS 3 I Pilot lamp HS3 All inputs
High
11 HS 2 I Pilot lamp HS2 active
12 HS 1 I Pilot lamp HS1
Pin
Signal Type Signal name
1
HR_A O Handwheel track A
2
XHR_A O Handwheel track A negated
3
HR_B O Handwheel track B
4
XHR_B O Handwheel track B negated
Pin
Signal Type Signal name Function
1
2P24
OE_S11/ZS2.2
V +24V
S11
2 NC contact S11 X4:9
*)
EMER- S11
3 GENCY_
STOP 1.1
EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1
EMER-
4 GENCY_
STOP 1.2
*) two-channel
Pin
Signal Type Signal name
1
Shield Shield potential
2 M24 V 24V ground
3 P24 V 24V potential
Notice
Use MPI bus connector 6FX2003-0A-0AA02!
Pin
Signal Type Signal name
NC
2 NC
not connected
not connected
3 rs I/O RS-485 data
4 ORTSAS O Output Request to Send, user interface
5 GND_EXT V 5V external ground
6 VCC_EXT V 5V external potential
7 NC not connected
8 XRS I/O RS-485 data
9 IRTSPG I/O In Request to Send PG
Pin Signal Type Signal name
1 NC not connected
2 3M24 V Reference potential 24V
3 rs I/O RS-485 data
4
ORTSAS O Output Request to Send, user interface
5
GND_EXT V 5V external ground
7
NC not connected
8
9
XRS
IRTSPG
I/O
I/O
RS-485 data
In Request to Send PG
The power supply potential P24 is not provided by PP 031 MC. An external 24V
power voltage supply enables handheld programming devices 702 and 705 to
be connected. External terminals with a separate 5V power supply cannot be
operated (fiber-optic technology).
Pin
1
Signal
DCD
Type
O
Signal name
Data Carrier Detect
2
RxD I Receive Data RS-232-C
3
TxD O Transmit Data RS-232-C
4 DTR I Data Terminal Ready
5 M V Supply voltage
6 DSR O Data Send Ready
7 RTS I Request To Send
8 CTS O Clear To Send
9 RI I Ring Indicator
single-chan- two-
nel channel
1
EMERGENCY_STOP
2.1
EMERGENCY STOP
NC contact 2.1
EMERGENCY STOP
2 MPI_A I/O RS-485 data MPI
3 3M24 V 24V ground Su ly
Supply
4 3P24 V +24V voltage
5 ZS1 ZS1.1 Enabling button
Enabling function
6 ZSCommon ZS2.2 Call enable key
7 HR_B Handwheel B
Handwheel
8 HR_A Handwheel A
EMERGENCY_STOP EMERGENCY STOP
9
1.2 NC contact 1.2
EMERGENCY STOP
EMERGENCY_STOP EMERGENCY STOP
10
1.1 NC contact 1.1
Jumper short-circuit
11 KEY2 I Key scanning No.3
connector
12
13
EMERGENCY_STOP
2.2
MPI_B I/O
EMERGENCY STOP
NC contact 2.2
RS-485 data
EMERGENCY STOP
MPI
14 ZS2 ZS2.1 Enabling button Enabling function
15 HR_XA Handwheel A negated Handwheel
Not assigned/enab-
16 N.C. ZS1.2 N.C./enable key
ling function
17 HR_XB Handwheel B negated Handwheel
Pin
Signal Type Signal name
1
F1 I Direct key 1
2
F2 I Direct key 2
3
3F I Direct key 3
4
5
6
4F
5F
F6
I
I
I
Direct key 4
Direct key 5
Direct key 6
7 F7 I Direct key 7
8 F8 I Direct key 8
9 F9 I Direct key 9
10 F10 I Direct key 10
11 F11 I Direct key 11
12 F12 I Direct key 12
13 F13 I Direct key 13
14 F14 I Direct key 14
15 F15 I Direct key 15
16 F16 I Direct key 16
17
P5 TAC
P5_TAC V 5V keyboard controller
18
19
M TAC
M_TAC V Ground of keyboard controller
20
The direct key module serves to connect the 16 direct keys of the A&D operator
panel front.
Pin
1
Signal
P24_5
Type
V
Signal name
24V potential
2 M24 V 24V ground
3 E55/W8 I Input key 55/matrix row 8
1
Pin
Signal
E52/W1
Type
I
Signal name
Input key 52/matrix row 1
2 E53/W2 I Input key 53/matrix row 2
3 E54/W4 I Input key 54/matrix row 4
4 E55/W8 I Input key 55/matrix row 8
5 HS24 O Connection of lamp HS24
6 HS25 O Connection of lamp HS25
7 HS26 O Connection of lamp HS26
8 HS27 O Connection of lamp HS27
Pin Signal Type Signal name
1 W3 I Matrix row 3
2 W5 I Matrix row 5
3 W6 I Matrix row 6
4 W7 I Matrix row 7
5 HS28 O Connection of lamp HS28
6 HS29 O Connection of lamp HS29
7 HS30 O Connection of lamp HS30
8 HS31 O Connection of lamp HS31
Pin
Signal Type Signal name
1
W9 I Matrix row 9
2
W10 I Matrix row 10
3
4
W11
W12
I
I
Matrix row 11
Matrix row 12
Connector X44 Connector type: 3-pin print terminal block MSTBA 2.5/3-G-5.08
Pin Signal Type Signal name
1 Shield I Ground
2 M24 V 24V potential
3 P24 V 24V ground
Pin
1
Signal
P24_5
Type
V
Signal name
24V potential
2 M24 V 24V ground
3 E12/R1 I Input key 12 / matrix line 1
4 E24/R2 I Input key 24 / matrix line 2
Pin
Signal Type Signal name
1
E30/R3 I Input key 30/matrix line 3
2
E61/R4 I Input key 61/matrix line 4
3
4
E62/R5
E63/R6
I
I
Input key 62/matrix line 5
Input key 63/matrix line 6
5 HS16 O Connection of lamp HS16
6 HS17 O Connection of lamp HS17
7 HS18 O Connection of lamp HS18
8 HS19 O Connection of lamp HS19
Pin
1
Signal
E14/R7
Type
I
Signal name
Input key 14/matrix line 7
2
E21/R8 I Input key 21/matrix line 8
3
E22/R9 I Input key 22/matrix line 9
4
5
E23/R10
HS20 O
I Input key 23/matrix line 10
Connection of lamp HS20
6 HS21 O Connection of lamp HS21
7 HS22 O Connection of lamp HS22
8 HS23 O Connection of lamp HS23
Connector parts
for I/O module Table 16-25 Connector parts for I/O module
PCB-IO matrix 3.81 No.
MC 1.5/4-ST-3.81 1803591
FRONT-MC 1.5/4-ST-3.81 1850686
X40 X43
X40, X43, X45
FK-MCP 1.5/4-ST-3.81 1851067
MCC 1/4-STZ-3,81 1852192
MC 1.5/8-ST-3.81 1803633
PCB-IO matrix 5.08 No.
X44 MSTBA 2.5/3-G-5.08 1779990
Properties of
jumper S Interlocking of axis motion via the PLC
button S11
S Interlocking of the enable key
S Jumpering of EMERGENCY STOP contacts on the handheld unit
S Manipulation-proof: Sealing cap prevents accidental actuation of key
S Jumper button, non-latching
S Initiation of a monitoring time for checking the operability of the EMER-
GENCY STOP jumpering function
Warning
! It is the users responsibility to ensure that the enable key is designed to DIN
EN 6020411, Subsection 9.2.5.8, and, when released or pushed down, stops
dangerous movements reliably.
When S11 is utilized for the EMERGENCY STOP jumpering function, an inter-
lock of hazardous motions must be implemented via the PLC with S11 and a
time monitor activated simultaneously, in addition to Fig. 16-7 and Fig. 16-8. If
the signaling contact on S11:31/32 is not properly closed again on expiry of the
monitoring time (approximately 5 minutes), then EMERGENCY STOP must
be generated by the PLC.
EMERGENCY STOP The EMERGENCY STOP circuit is a two-channel configuration with the follow-
circuits ing layout:
S For circuit 1:
NC contact S13X4:6X5:12XS12:12EMERGENCY STOP handheld
unitXS12:1X5:1X4:7
S For circuit 2:
NC contact S13X24:4X5:9XS12:9EMERGENCY STOP handheld
unitXS12:10X5:10X24:3.
Enable circuits There are two variants of enable circuit, i.e. single-channel and two-channel
(see below).
The circuit is illustrated in Fig. 16-7 and the terminal assignments in Table 16-26
(see below).
PP031-MC X25
EMERGENCY STOP
interf.
X16
2P24
M24
PG
M
M P5
S13
OPI
Filter X15
X13
Repeater
3M24
3P24
13 13
PCB dis 2 2
tributor II 4 4
X22
1 1 3M24 3 3
2 2 1 8 8
3 3 2 15 15
4 4 3 7 7
4 16 17
Jumper 17 16
S11 X23
X23 11 11
2P24 7 32 31 8
5 44 43 6 10 10
4 21 22 3 6 6
1 14 13 2 1 1
14 14
12 12
9 9
5 5
M24 X5
HPU/OPI
/ OP7HH
2P24
X24 X4
EMERGENCY STOP 4 3 2 1 9 6 8 7 1 11 2 12 3 4 5 10
circuit 2
Br5 *)
EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1 Br1
6 14 16 5
Enabling button
Custom-made wiring
1 12 9 10 6 5 14 7 15 8 17 11 4 3 2 13
XS12
1 12 9 10 6 5 14 4 3 2 13
HPU
Handheld
programming unit HPU MPI
Type MPI
EMERGENCY STOP Enabling button Power
6FC5403-0AA00-0AA1 supply
1 12 9 10 11 4
Terminator
Terminator
(component PP031-MC) 3P24
1 EMER- EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP Br1
GENCY_ button 2.1 button 2.1
2
3
STOP 2.1
MPI_A
3M24
XRS_KP
0V
SD0
0V
4 3P24 24V 24V BR3
5 ZS1 Enabling button Enabling button
6 ZSCommon Enabling button
7 HR_B Handwheel pulses,
track B
8 HR_A Handwheel pulses,
track A
9 EMER- EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP Br2
GENCY_ button 1.2 button 1.2
STOP 1.2
10 EMER- EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP Br2
GENCY_ button 1.1 button 1.1
STOP 1.1
11 KEY2 BR3
12 EMER- EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP Br1
GENCY_ button 2.2 button 2.2
STOP 2.2
13 MPI_B RS_KP NSD0
14 ZS2 Enabling button Enabling button
15 HR_XA Handwheel pulses,
track XA
16
17 HR_XB Handwheel pulses,
track XB
The circuit is illustrated in Fig. 16-8 and the terminal assignments in Table 16-27
(see below).
PP031-MC X25
EMERGENCY STOP
2P24
M24
X16
interf.
PG
M
M P5
S13
OPI
Filter X15
X13
Repeater
3M24
3P24
13 13
PCB dis 2 2
tributor II 4 4
X22
1 1 3M24 3 3
2 2 1 8 8
3 3 2 15 15
4 4 3 7 7
4 16 17
Jumper 17 16
S11 X23
X23 11 11
2P24 7 32 31 8
5 44 43 6 10 10
4 21 22 3 6 6
1 14 13 2 1 1
14 14
12 12
9 9
5 5
M24 X5
HPU/OPI
/ OP7HH
2P24
X24 X4
EMERGENCY STOP 4 3 2 1 9 6 8 7 1 11 2 12 3 4 5 10
circuit 2
Br5 *)
EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1 Br1
6 14 16 5
Enabling button
Custom-made wiring
1 12 9 10 6 5 14 16 7 15 8 17 11 4 3 2 13
XS12
1 12 9 10 6 5 14 16 4 3 2 13
HT6
Handheld terminal
HT6 MPI
6FC5 403-0AA10-0AA0
EMERGENCY STOP Power
supply
Enabling button 11 4
1 12 9 10
Terminator
Terminator
(component PP031 MC) 3P24
1
EMERGENCY_
STOP 2.1
EMERGENCY STOP
button 2.1
EMERGENCY STOP
button 2.1
Br1
2
3
MPI_A
3M24
MPI_A
M
MPI_A
M
4 3P24 P24 P24 BR3
5 ZS1.1 ZS1.1 ZS1.1
6 ZS2.2 ZS2.2 ZS2.2
7 HR_B HRB
8 HR_A HRA
9 EMERGENCY_ EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP Br2
STOP 1.2 button 1.2 button 1.2
10 EMERGENCY_ EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP Br2
STOP 1.1 button 1.1 button 1.1
11 KEY2 KEY2 KEY2 BR3
12 EMERGENCY_ EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP Br1
STOP 2.2 button 2.2 button 2.2
13 MPI_B MPI_B MPI_B
14 ZS2.1 ZS2.1 ZS2.1
15 HR_XA HR_XA
16 ZS1.2 ZS1.2 ZS1.2
17 HR_XB HR_XB
Dimension
drawing
482.6
Power
155
444
105
50
70
Panel cutout
1)
+0.2
137.4 0.2
+0.5
131.4 452.8$ 1
1
4.8 or M4
6 0.5
0
0
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.2
116.2+0.2
0.2
464.8 +0.2
232.4 +0.2
348.6 +0.2
458.8 +0.5
6
Mounting For fastening the PP 031 MC (dimensions, see Fig. 16-10) it is recommended to
preparations use 10 screws M4x10 with washers and sealing strips on the rear side of the
operator panel. The washers are essential to avoid damage to the surface.
Normally, degree of protection IP65 is achieved through the sealing strips in the
shipped state provided the mounting surface is even. In case of uneven mount-
ing surfaces, it is possible that only IP54 can be achieved.
Recommended material: e.g. foam scotch tape Y-9533,
9x0.8mm
from 3M
Connecting 24V The 24V power supply is connected via a 3-way terminal block (see Fig. 16-6)
power supply to connector X8 on the rear side of the machine control panel. The equipotential
bonding conductor is fastened using an M5 screw and must be linked with the
central ground standard part.
Danger
! The 24VDC power supply must always be grounded and be designed as
Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) protection by function low volt-
age with safe isolation!
Connecting MPI The PP 031 MC is connected to the 840D or S7-300 control by means of an
connection MPI bus line. The MPI connector is plugged into X15 on the rear of the PP 031
MC and fixed with a screw.
Connecting Emergency stop, selector switch and single contacts are connected according
individual wiring to the required custom-made links.
(for function see Figs. 16-17 to 16-21)
Supply voltages for inputs and outputs must always be grounded!
Note
To use the actuating element WS1 as a mode selector switch a keyswitch
CG4-1A251-600 *FS1 V750D/2J must be installed in accordance with EU
Directive 89/392/EEC.
slide-in labels
Cutting edge bordering
0
must be printed
8.5
Corners rounded R1.5
19.9
Dimensions for labeling the slide-in labels (designation field; WS1)
34.1
13
(variable switching elements S1 to S4; S7 to S10; S14; S15)
45.5
7 7
180
Dimensions for labeling the slide-in user labels
Slide-in direction
43.8
82
146
16.1
Dimensions for labeling the slide-in labels (S11; XS12)
Slide-in direction
16.1 26.5
23.8
14
0 0
10
20
Fig. 16-12 Dimensions for texts on the slide-in labels
Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved
16-362 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components Manual (BH) 11.02 Edition
10.00 16 Operator Component PP 031 MC
16.9 Labeling control elements
Labeling
on the rear side of
the device
S11
2P24
*HR-B
HR-B
*HR-A
HR-A
HS7
2 1
HS8
S1
X43
S2 HS9
X44 3
HS10
1
HS1
1
8
HS2 S7
X45
HS3 S8
X41
HS4 S9
WS1 S11
4
S10
1
8 1
S1 S7
S1 S8
X46
S2 S9
X42
S3 S10
8
S4
S3
1
4 1
Board INPUT/OUTPUT
S4 2P24
S1 S7
X47
HS1 HS7
X43
8
1
S2 S8
Option
Option
HS2 HS8
S3 S9
HS3 HS9
HS14
S14 S15
S14 S15
S4 S10
HS4 HS10 HS15
S14 S15
HS14 HS15
1.6AT
X30
WS3 WS2
HW FAULT S7-300(2)
>
S7-300
BUS
Request 840 D
4321 ON
4321 4 3 21
OFF
S18 S16 S17
PP 031 MC
Expansion
customer control
panel CCP
95
8.8
125.05
482.6 8.8
Panel cutout
1)
+0.2
77.4 0.2
+0.5
71.4 452.8$ 1
1
4.8 or M4
6 0.5
0
0
0.5
0.2
116.2 +0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
464.8 +0.2
232.4 +0.2
348.6 +0.2
458.8 +0.5
6
16.11.1 Inputs/outputs
Inputs
Table 16-28 Inputs (possible combinations)
tacts tacts
1 without 14 contacts 14 without 10 contacts
2 7 keys 11 contacts 15 7 keys 7 contacts
3 12 keys 10 contacts 16 12 keys 6 contacts
4 14 keys 9 contacts 17 14 keys 5 contacts
5 24 keys 8 contacts 18 24 keys 4 contacts
6 36 keys 7 contacts 19 36 keys 3 contacts
7 48 keys 6 contacts 20 48 keys 2 contacts
8 60 keys 5 contacts 21 60 keys 1 contact
9 72 keys 4 contacts 22 72 keys 0 contacts
10 84 keys 3 contacts
Functions of keys in the matrix:
11 96 keys 2 contacts
+ Non-latching key
12 108 keys 1 contact + Single-key actuation
+ No switch function
13 120 keys 0 contacts
Key matrix Eight inputs W3, W5, W6, W7, W9, W10, W11, W12 for matrix.
option Four outputs A28 to A31 for driving lamps.
Matrix keyboard
scan
Number No
of active blocks
= 1?
Yes
Save the active
block Rn
Scan inputs
W1, W2, W4, W8
Parity No
OK?
Yes
Save RnWn
Bounce suppression
function
Custom-made There are various possible applications for connecting the key inputs KEY0 to
wiring KEY2:
1. Enabling key connection according to Fig. 16-7 and 16-8.
2. Use as isolated inputs with reference potential at X4/5
3. Use of button S11 with PLC function without jumpering.
For the required jumper assignment and their meaning, please refer to the
Tables below.
Br1 Br5
Use of the connections X4:1;2;3 as isolated inputs. The refer-
ence potential is at X4:4 here.
X X PLC function
Use of the
connections Table 16-31 Use of the connections
Potential Port Use
X3/11,12 Control of inputs HS1 to HS4, HS7 to HS10, HS14 and HS15
2P24
X24/1 Controlling the inputs KEY 0 to KEY 2
KEY0...2
X4/1 ... 3
Inputs KEY0 to KEY2
Reference potential of inputs KEY 0 to KEY 2;
M24 X4/5
no external use.
S11
2P24 X5
2P24
2P24 M24
X24 1) X4
4321 9 6 5 10 7 4 12 11 8 1 2 3 X3
11 12
Br1 Br52)
External contacts
1) S11 connection with single-channel variant only
2) Signal to PLC: Triggers a monitoring timer.
If the signal level is still low or open on timeout (approx. 5min),
the PLC must initiate an EMERGENCY STOP (see also Fig. 137).
Ext. control of
pilot lamps
HS1 ... HS10
Block Sn
HSn 2P24
1M24
External contact
Circuit for
EMERGENCY
STOP button
1 1 1 1 3
EMER- to PLC
GENCY
STOP button 2 2 2 2 4
optional
Connection of
spindle speed
override WS3 X18.1 WS3 6FC5 247-0AA34-0AA0
rd
C
16
rd
8
X18.2
Fig. 16-20 Connection WS3 spindle speed override spindle speed/rapid traverse
X30
20
19
18
17
16 F16
15 F15
14 F14
13 F13
12 F12
PCB direct keys
PP031 MC 11 F11
10 F10
9 F9 +
8 F8
5 V +10%
7 F7
6 F6
5 5F
4 4F
3 3F
2 2F
1 F1
Connection of
Single contacts
customer control W8
Lamps
SE11 SE12 SE13 SE14
panel W4 HS27
W1; W2; W4; W8
only as an alternative HS26
to the key matrix, W2
HS25
X42, X43
Unassigned W1 HS24
R10*) HS23
X43
R6 HS19
X47
R3
X46
HS16
X41
P24_5
M24
X45 R2
SE1 SE2
R1
X40
M24
X44
P24
Row n=2
Group
Group
Group
M24
SMn
SM2
SM1
W12
W11
W10
W9
Lamps
HS31
W7
HS30
HS29 W6
HS28
SMn.6
SM2.6
SM1.4 SM1.5 SM1.6
W5
When these are connected, the
SMn.3 SMn.4 SMn.5
SM2.4 SM2.5
W4
W3
Inputs R1 to R10
SM1.1 SM1.2 SM1.3
SM2.3
W2
SMn.1 SMn.2
SM2.1 SM2.2
W1
Fig. 16-22 Connecting the customer control panel to the I/O PCB
Wiring
example P24_5 * switch
Not usable
is used
Individual M24 Authorization
X45
keys switch is used
X47
R8 *
E21*
R7 *
E14*
X46
R4
E61
R3
E30
SE2
R2
E24
X45
SE1
R1
E12
SM1.7 SM1.6 SM1.5 SM1.4 SM1.3 SM1.2 SM1.1
(W1)
E52
(W2)
E53
(W3)
(W4)
E54
(W5)
(W6)
Inputs PLC
(W7)
Group
X41, X42
SM1
SEW8
(W8)
E55
(W9)
nc
nc = not connected
(W10)
nc nc
(W11)
X43
(W12)
nc
(W8)
P24_5 PB
E19
M24 (even)
X40
X44 1 3 2
from central
power M24
supply P24
Fig. 16-23 Wiring example eleven single keys and seven matrix keys
16.13.1 PP 031 MC
Electrical data
Total current Rated volts. Voltage up- Voltage Fuse
per limit lower limit
max. 1A 24VDC 30.2VDC 18.5VDC 1.6AT
Mechanical data
Dimensions Height Width Mounting Depth to the
depth front
155mm 483mm 105mm 70mm
Environmental conditions
Installed/in operation Storage/transport
Front Rear side
Temperature ranges 0 ... 45C 0 ... 55C 40 ... 70C
Degree of protection IP 54 IP 10A
Degree of protection I to IEC 204 I
Key contact maker Contacts with floating outputs S1 to S4; S7 to S10; S11; S14; S15 (NC contact
or NO contact)
AC DC
Nominal insulation voltage Ue 50V 50V
Nominal operating current Ie 2A
Rated operating current at 24V Ie 2A
Min. rated operating current at 5V Imin 1mA
Volume resistance < 20m
Switching capacity 10Ie 1.1le
Max. operating current for reference po- 8A 8A
tential
Nominal operating voltage
Load
Ue
AC
300V
DC
300V
resistive 10A
Switching capacity
inductive > 2A
resistive 10A
Switching capacity at 24V
inductive 6A
Nominal values for arc-
0.3A 0.22A
free switching at 24V
Utilization category AC DC
(EN 60947-5-1)
Rated operating voltage Ue 24V 24V
AC-12 le 10A
AC-15 le 6A
Switching capacity
DC-12 le 10A
DC-13 le 3A
Min. rated operating current at lmin 1mA
5V
For further parameters, see pushbutton and indicator light SIGNUM 3SB3
Status Voltage Current switched
switched
Nominal value 24V
H signal
Min. 4mA (at 15V)
Signal level +15V to +30V
Max. 9.5mA (at 30V)
L signal
Nominal value
Signal level
0V or open
3V to +5V
In a group of 3
Max. 50m
Cable length
AWG 2016
Status
Nominal value
Voltage switched
24V
Current switched
50mA
Pilot lamp ON (making current
Signal level +18V to +30V max. 600mA)
Pilot lamp OFF Nominal value open
Cable length
Max. 10m AWG 2016
X30
Status
Voltage switched Current switched
Nominal value 5V
H signal
Signal level +5V or open
Nominal value
L signal
Signal level 3V to +1V < 11mA
In a group of 16
Cable length Max 0.6m AWG 28
Power supply
Total current Rated voltage Voltage up- Voltage Fuse
per limit lower limit
Max. = 5A, depend-
24VDC 30.2VDC 18.5VDC 2x10A
ing on the lamp load
Inputs X41, X42, X43, X45, X46, X47: E12, E14, E21 to E24, E30, E52 to E55, E61 to
E63, W1 to W12
Status Voltage switched Current switched
Nominal value +24V
H signal Min. 3.6mA (at 15V)
Signal level +15V to +30V
Max. 8mA (at 30V)
Nominal value 0V or open
L signal
Signal level 3V to +5V
In a group of
Cable length
Common root
Max. 50m, AWG 16
Status
Nominal value
Voltage switched
+24V
Current switched
H signal
Signal level +20V to +30V Max. 0.5A/output
Nominal value
L signal
Signal level open < 25A
In a group of 16
Cable length Max. 50m, AWG 16
Output
Max. 5A
total current
Status
Voltage switched Current switched
Output total current
Nominal value +24V
Max. 700mA
Word 0 + direction I/O direction Variable keys
High
S15 E14/R7 S14 E12/R1 S4 S3 S2 S1
Key
Word 1
Low
switch 0
I/O GD project Version activation GD project
STOP
*) DIP E30/R3 S13 S10 S9 S8 S7 E24/R2
S16/1
Word 2 Direct keys
Low
F8 F7 F6 5F 4F 3F F2 F1
Word 2 Direct keys
High
GD project
F16 F15 F14 F13 F12 F11 F10 F9
Word 3 I/O Spindle speed/rapid traverse
Low
E55/W8 E54/W4 E53/W2 E52/W1 D C B A
Word 3 I/O Feed override
High
E63/R6 E62/R5 E61/R4 E D C B A
*) All bits identified with DIP-S16/1 are simultaneously switched when S16/1 is actuated.
Legend:
High active signals S1 ... S4; High active/Low active settable via S18.2
S7... S10; S18.2 closed = Low active
S14;
S15
S18.2 open = High active
Low active signals Ex/HSx I/O high active via a plug-on card supplied as
an option
Word 2 Unassigned
High
Word 3 Unassigned
Lo
Low
Word 3 Unassigned
High
Notice
When the mode is switched over, Low can be output briefly for all signals on
selector switch SW1!
I.e., all safety-relevant signals are linked such that they are only possible if
switch WS1 has a defined position.
16.15 Initialization
Assignments The following settings are possible with the switches DIP S16, S17, S18:
DIP switch
settings Table 16-46 Default setting for 840D
Application:
Connecting the PP 031 MC to an 840D
S17 S16 S18
Meaning
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
X off on off on on off off off off X off 187.5 kbaud/1.5 Mbaud
Transmission cycle time
100 msecs, bus address 6
Set of parameters 1
Prerequisite:
none, can be directly connected to the MPI/OPI of the 840D
Application:
Connecting the PP 031 MC to an S7-300
S17 S16 S18
Meaning
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
off off on off on on off on off off X off 187.5 kbaud
Transmission cycle time
100 msecs, bus address 6
Set of parameters 2
Prerequisite:
A global data table created using HISTEP
Table 16-48 Setting for S7-300 with two machine control panels
Application:
Connecting two PP 031 MCs to an S7-300
S17 S16 S18
Meaning
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
off off on off on on off on off on X off 187.5 kbaud
Transmission cycle time
100 msecs, bus address 6
Set of parameters 3
Prerequisite:
A global data table created using HISTEP
Settings of The load on the PLC by the PP 031 MC can thus be adapted.
transmission
cycle time The PLC expects a message frame from the PP 031 MC at least every
500 msecs.
The PP 031 MC sends a message frame to the PLC at cyclic intervals when no
key is pressed. This cycle time is set on S17 DIP switches 2 and 3.
Communication The switchover of the sets of parameters (GD identifications) for communication
parameters between control system and PP 031 MC is carried out using the DIP switches
S16/1 or S18/3.
The switchover will only come into effect after power ON on PP 031 MC.
ters 1 ters 2 ters 3
1
Receive GD circuit no. 1 2
2 Receive GBZ no. Internal 1 1
3 Object no. for receive GBZ Assign- 1 1
ment
4 Send GD circuit no. 1 2
5 Send GBZ no. 2 2
6
Object no. for send GBZ 1 1
Global data table When the PP 031 MC is operated in conjunction with an S7-300 CPU, set of
parameters 2 is selected and a global data table is created using HISTEP.
In this case, communication with the PP 031 MC must be configured as follows:
GD identification ebf/s7-300:: ebf/PP 031 MC::
GD 1.1.1 >>ab60:8 eb0:8
GD 1.2.1 eb60:8 >>ab0:8
The specifications ab60 and eb60 for S7 are only examples; the signals can
also be transferred to other locations.
The GD identification is generated by the compiler.
GD 1.1.1 PP 031 MC is receiver
GD 1.2.1 PP 031 MC is transmitter
This assignment corresponds to set of parameters 2 as per Table 16-49.
Note
Make sure that a data width of eight bytes is always assigned for the input and
output image!
GD 1.1.1
GD identification ebf/s7-300::
>>ab60:8
ebf/PP 031 MC::
eb0:8
ebf/PP 031 MC_2::
GD 1.2.1
GD 2.1.1
eb60:8
>>ab120:8
>>ab0:8
eb0:8
GD 2.2.1
eb118:8 >>ab0:8
Danger
! The transmission path (MPI/OPI) from PP 031 MC to the central controller must
be monitored by the user.
Note
Monitoring of the MPI link between SIMATIC S7 and PP 031 can be imple-
mented with the global data bit, bit 31. The user can reset bit 31 and provide it
with a watchdog. If this bit is not set again within the predefined time interval, a
fault in the line is the cause.
Lamp replacement 1. Prize off the button cap towards the front with a screwdriver.
for illuminated
2. Lever out the button holder using lamp remover LZ5.
keys, illuminated
switches 3. Change the lamp using service tool LZ5 or a suitable insulating tube.
4. Refit the button holder and cap in reverse order.
Note
Lamp remover LZ5 is not a SIEMENS product. It can be obtained from the
Schlegel company.
Changing the 1. Prize off the cap and the label holder towards the front with a screwdriver.
lamps on pilot 2. Use the lamp remover of service tool LZ5 or a suitable insulating tube to
lamps change the lamp.
3. Refit the cap and the label holder.
Notice
When using LEDs, make sure that they are connected with the correct polarity
(see Fig. 16-9: dimension drawing of PP 031 MC) !
Insert slide-in
labels 1. Create the slide-in labels (see Fig. 16-11).
2. Remove the protective film from the label slot.
3. Slide in the labels (with print facing the operator side).
4. Align the texts in the window.
Note
Slide in the labels when the PP 031 MC operator panel front is not yet installed.
Changing a 1. Loosen the cap nut on the pushbutton until the contact maker has almost
contact maker been reached.
2. Pull the pushbutton and the contact maker approximately 3mm out of the
fixture (the locating pin of the pushbutton must be freed).
3. Turn the pushbutton approx. 20 to the right or left, remove it from the con-
tact maker and remove the cap nut.
4. Change the contact element, remove the defective contact maker from the
fixture and press the new contact maker down into the fixture.
5. Insert the pushbutton into the opening and screw on the cap nut partially.
6. Press the pushbutton down until it rests on the contact maker. When doing
so, observe the position of the locking lose.
7. Screw the cap nut tight (max. torque 0.8Nm).
16.18 Configuring
16.18.1 Delivery variants
Note
When replacing the existing PP 031 devices with variants of the PP 031 MC,
downwards compatibility cannot always be guaranteed!
PP 031 MC/HR 6 F C 5 2 0 3 0 A D 2 5
as the base unit, in addition, 0 A A 0
with 17-pin handheld unit socket connector
and jumper button with repeater function and
distributor
single-channel enabling function
PP 031 MC/HR II 6 F C 5 2 0 3 0 A D 2 5
as the base unit, in addition, 1 A A 0
with 17-pin handheld unit socket connector
and jumper button with repeater function and
distributor
two-channel enabling function
PP 031 MC-S 6 F C 5 2 0 3 0 A D 2 6
Special variant based on PP 031 MC; 0 A A 0
the appropriate fitting is uniquely defined by an
additional ID No.
(see Subsection 16.18.3)
PP 031 MC/HR-S 6 F C 5 2 0 3 0 A D 2 7
Special variant based on PP 031 MC; 0 A A 0
the appropriate fitting is uniquely defined by an
additional ID No. (see Subsection 16.18.3),
single-channel enabling function
PP 031 MC/HR-S II 6 F C 5 2 0 3 0 A D 2 7
Special variant based on PP 031 MC; the ap- 1 A A 0
propriate fitting is uniquely defined by an addi-
tional ID No. (see Subsection 16.18.3),
two-channel enabling function
1) When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding functionality,
observe the standard EN 60204 Part1 or VDE 0113 Part1, Section Pushbuttons/Colors.
Extensions to the PP 031 (can be ordered and installed by the customer separately)
Override switch, 16-level speed 6 F C 5 2 4 7 0 A A 3 4
0 A A 1
Suspension device for keyboard and mouse 6 F C 5 2 4 7 0 A A 4 0
0 A A 0
+/ keys raised 6 F C 5 2 4 7 0 A A 4 1
0 A A 0
PCB_input/output without option 6 F C 5 2 4 7 0 A A 4 2
0 A A 0
Set of M4x12 flange bolts (30) 6 F C 5 2 4 7 0 A A 4 4
0 A A 0
2x NC contacts for Emergency Stop buttons 3 S B 3 4 0 0 0 E
EMERGENCY STOP protective shroud 3 S B 3 9 2 1 0 A K
Spare parts kit PP 031 MC 6 F C 5 2 4 7 0 A A 2 7
5 covers, 5 films, 2 sealing caps, set of button 0 A A 0
caps, 5 incandescent lamps with base,
1 dummy plug, 1 illuminated key contact
maker
Actuator/accessories Switching element/ ing
Pilot lamp location
Pilot lamp
Lamp nipple
28mm
RXJN-GB (yellow)
Lamp socket AL5 with
incandescent lamp
T5.5K/30
S1 ... S4
S7 ...
S10
Lamp
RXJN-GN (green) or spot LED L5.5K28UG S14,
RXJN-RT (red) (green) L5.5K28UR S15
RXJN-BL (blue) (red) L5.5K28UW
RXJN-KL (transp. (white) L5.5K28UY (am-
glass) ber)
RXJN-WS (white) L5.5K28UB (blue)
Buttons
Pushbutton 28mm Button contact maker S11
RXJT-GB (yellow) AT2 1 NC contact (internal), 2 NO
RXJT-GN (green) contact + 1 NC contact (ext.)
RXJT-RT (red) For S1 1 NC contact (int.), 2
RXJT-BL (blue) NO cont. + 1 NC cont. (ext.)
RXJT-KL (transparent For S2...S4, S7...S10 1 NC
glass) contact (internal), 1 NO con-
RXJT-GSW (black) tact + 1 NC contact (external)
For S14, S15 1 NC contact
int., 2 NO contacts ext.
Illuminated keys Pushbutton 28mm Illuminated key contact For S1 1 NC contact (inter.), 2
with fixture for T5.5K RXJT-GB (yellow) maker ATL2 with incan- NO cont. + 1 NC cont. (ext.)
RXJT-GN (green) descent lamp T5.5K/30 For S...S4, S7...S10 1 NC
RXJT-RT (red) or spot LED contact (internal), 1 NO con-
RXJT-BL (blue) L5,5K28UG (green) tact + 1 NC contact (external)
RXJT-KL (transparent L5.5K28UR (red) For S14, S15 1 NC contact
glass) L5.5K28UW (white) (internal), 2 NO contacts (ext.)
L5.5K28UY (yellow) Lamp externally controllable
L5.5K28UB (blue)
Keyswitch
Switching angle 900
Safety lock cylinder
28mm
Button contact maker
AT2
For S1 1 NC contact (int.), 2
NO cont. + 1 NC cont. (ext.)
2 position keys, RXJSSA 15 E For S1...S4, S7...S10
removable in both 1 NC contact (internal), 1 NO
positions contact + 1 NC contact (ext.)
S14, S15 1 NC contact (int.),
2 NO contacts (ext.)
Raised keys 6FC5 2 RTAO pushbuttons 2 AT2
247-0AA41-0AA0 with plunger elong. Special design
Designation field
Replaceable text insert
strips
Dummy plug BVR22 S14 and S15 with base unit
Selector switch Knob FS1 WS1 Re-equipping to knob-oper-
ated switch
Speed/rapid 6FC5 247-0AA34-0AA1 WS3 Connection to PCB PP 031R
traverse override
Switching element: 2 3SB3400-0E Expans. NC contact EMER-
EMERGENCY NC contacts GENCY STOP
S13
STOP Protective collar for 3SB3921-0AK Protection against accidental
frontplate fixing release
Note
When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding func-
tionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part1 or VDE 0113 Part1, Section
Pushbuttons/Colors.
One of the following rating plates is attached to the components and modules:
Components Example:
F2 L3
A5E00022993 A/B
6FC5 2030A220AA0
PP031 MC
In case of technical queries or service, please quote all data on the rating plate
to the local SIEMENS office responsible for your equipment.
J
S The key information is transmitted to the MMC via a mini DIN (PS/2) inter-
face.
Connecting cable between keyboard and MMC.
Purpose The QWERTY keyboard can be used as a full keyboard and as an NC key-
board.
Key assignments
Alphanumeric keygroup NC function/cursor Numerical key-
with special characters keygroup with spe- group with spe-
cial characters cial characters
1...n & * (
Q W E R T Y U I O P 7 8 9 /?
A S D F G H J K L Del ~ 4$ 5% 6 ^ * Del
: | _
Z X C V B N M ; \ 1! 2@ 3 #
Keyboard interface
to MMC
MMC CPU
MFII
interface X10
Signal names:
KBCLK Keyboard Clock
KBDATA Keyboard Data
P5 +5V
M Ground
Signal type:
O Output
B Bidirectional
V Voltage Input
Switch S78
AT XT
(as of 12.98)
Rear side of keyboard S78
You can use switch S78 to toggle between AT mode (delivery status) and XT
mode and vice versa.
Note
When you change the mode, you must reboot the control/PC so that the new
switch settings are recognized.
The QWERTY keyboard with S78 switch can be ordered under Order No.:
6FC5 203-0AC00-0AA2.
Dimension
drawings 132.5
123.7
8.8
0
0 8.8 125 241.2 357.4 473.8 482.6
Installation of
QWERTY keyboard
Required clearance
500
18 M5 grounding connector Z
12.5
Recommended bolt M4
with washer DIN 125,
enclosed as loose part
(for front mounting)
M4 welding stud
without flange
for rear
mounting
Detail Z
Permitted mounting
position max. 60
to the perpendicular
Front
Panel cutout
Distance when mounting the QWERTY keyboard
and the operator panel >18
4.3 or M4
114.90.2
107.20.5
Panel cutout
Electrical data
Max. voltage 5.25V
Typical 18mA
Max. power loss 131.25mVA
Mechanical data
Dimensions Width Height Depth
482.6mm 132mm 15mm
Ground 1500g
Basic color of casing Anthracite, acc. to SN 47030, Part 2, Color code:
614
Mean time between failures 1507.33 fit (875.7 years)
Environmental conditions
Temperature ranges Rear 0 ... 55C
Front 0 ... 45C
Temperature changes within 1 minute max. 0.2K
Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5
within 1 minute max. 0.1%
Storage 20C to 60C
Degree of protection to DIN 40050 Front IP 54, rear IP 00
Slot 1 Slot 2
ISA/card ISA/card
PCI ISA/card
ISA/card PCI
PCI PCI
Note
The ISA card will no longer be supported in the medium term. Please use only
PCI cards for new installations.
Bus terminal
X221
Slot 1 X4
X220
X3
Slot 2
120 4 72
X151...X153 X1 X121...X123
Warning
! The PCI adapter cannot be used on the MMC 101/102.
Position of
interfaces
Card interface
X153
8/16-bit card
interface
X151
X221
X220
X3
X4
X122
X123
X121
PCI
interface PCI slot interface
Interface overview
S X3, X4: PCI slot interface
S X220, X221: 8/16-bit card interface
S X121...X123: PCI option interface
PCI slot
interface
X3, X4
Pin A
Designation Signal type Pin B Designation Signal type
1 XTRST in (pull down) 1 N12 power
2 P12 power 2 TCK in (pull down)
3 TMS in (pull up) 3 M power
4 TDI in (pull up) 4 TDO (open)
5 P5 power 5 P5 power
6 XINTA o/d 6 P5 power
(X4: XINTB)
7 XINTC o/d 7 XINTB o/d
(X4: XINTD) (X4: XINTC)
8 P5 power 8 XINTD o/d
(X4: XINTA)
9 Reserved 9 XPRSNT1 in (via 10nF on M)
10 P5 power 10 Reserved
11 Reserved 11 XPRSNT2 in (via 10nF on M)
12 M power 12 M power
13 M power 13 M power
14 Reserved 14 Reserved
15 XRST in 15 M power
16
P5
power 16 CLK0 in
(X4: CLK1)
17 XGNT0 t/s 17 M power
(X4: XGNT1)
18 M power 18 XREQ0 t/s
(X4: XREQ1)
19 Reserved 19 P5 power
20 AD30 t/s 20 AD31 t/s
21 P3V3 power 21 AD29 t/s
22
AD28
t/s 22 M power
23 AD26 t/s 23 AD27 t/s
24 M power 24 AD25 t/s
25
26
AD24
IDSEL
t/s
t/s (X3: AD28, X4: AD29)
25
26
P3V3
XCBE3
power
t/s
27 P3V3 power 27 AD23 t/s
28 AD22 t/s 28 M power
29 AD20 t/s 29 AD21 t/s
30 M power 30 AD19 t/s
31 AD18 t/s 31 P3V3 power
32 AD16 t/s 32 AD17 t/s
Pin A
Designation Signal type Pin B Designation Signal type
34 XFRAME s/t/s 34 M power
35 M power 35 XIRDY s/t/s
36
XTRDY
s/t/s 36 P3V3 power
37 M power 37 XDEVSEL s/t/s
38 XSTOP s/t/s 38 M power
39 P3V3 power 39 XLOCK s/t/s
40 SDONE in/out (pull up) 40 XPERR s/t/s
41 XSBO in/out (pull up) 41 P3V3 power
42 M power 42 XSERR o/d
43 PAR t/s 43 P3V3 power
44 AD15 t/s 44 XCBE1 t/s
45 P3V3 power 45 AD14 t/s
46 AD13 t/s 46 M power
47
AD11
t/s 47 AD12 t/s
48 M power 48 AD10 t/s
49 AD9 t/s 49 M power
50 mechanical coding 50 mechanical coding
51
52
53
XCBE0
P3V3
mechanical
t/s
power
coding 51
52
53
AD8
AD7
mechanical
t/s
t/s
coding
54
AD6
t/s 54 P3V3 power
55 AD4 t/s 55 AD5 t/s
56 M power 56 AD3 t/s
57 AD2 t/s 57 M power
58 AD0 t/s 58 AD1 t/s
59 P5 power 59 P5 power
60 XREQ64 s/t/s (pull up) 60 XACK64 s/t/s (pull up)
61 P5 power 61 P5 power
62 P5 power 62 P5 power
in = input, out = output, t/s = tri state and bidirectional, s/t/s = sustained tri state
and bidirectional, o/d = open drain
Signal names: XTRST Test reset
TMS Test mode select
TDI Test data input
XINTA Interrupt A
XINTC Interrupt B
XRST Reset
XGNT Grant
AD(0..32) System address bus/system data bus
XFRAME Cycle frame
XTRDY Target ready (=selected device ready)
XSTOP Stops the current transaction
SDONE Snoop done
XSBO Snoop backoff
PAR Parity
XCBE0 Bus command(0) and byte enable(0)
multiplexed on the same PCI pin
XREQ Request
X220, X221
Pin Pin Pin Pin
Name Type Name Type Name Type Name Type
B A D C
1 1M VO 1 XIOCHCK I 1 XMEMCS16 I 1 XSBHE O
2 RSTDRV O 2 SD7 B 2 XIOCS16 I 2 LA23 O
3 1P5 VO 3 SD6 B 3 IRQ10 I 3 LA22 O
4 IRQ9 I 4 SD5 B 4 IRQ11 I 4 LA21 O
5 1N5 5 SD4 B 5 IRQ12 I 5 LA20 O
6 DRQ2 O 6 SD3 B 6 IRQ15 I 6 LA19 O
7 1N12 VO 7 SD2 B 7 IRQ14 I 7 LA18 O
8 XZEROWS I 8 SD1 B 8 XDACK0 I 8 LA17 O
9 1P12 VO 9 SD0 B 9 DRQ0 O 9 XMEMR O
10 1M VO 10 IOCHRDY I 10 XDACK5 I 10 XMEMW O
11 XSMEMW O 11 AEN O 11 DRQ5 O 11 SD8 B
12 XSMEMR O 12 SA19 O 12 XDACK6 I 12 SD9 B
13 XIOW O 13 SA18 O 13 DRQ6 O 13 SD10 B
14 XIOR O 14 SA17 O 14 XDACK7 I 14 SD11 B
15 XDACK3 I 15 SA16 O 15 DRQ7 O 15 SD12 B
16 DRQ3 O 16 SA15 O 16 1P5 VO 16 SD13 B
17 XDACK1 I 17 SA14 O 17 XMASTER I 17 SD14 B
18 DRQ1 O 18 SA13 O 18 1M VO 18 SD15 B
19 XREFRESH O 19 SA12 O
20 SYSCLK O 20 SA11 O
21 IRQ7 I 21 SA10 O
22 IRQ6 I 22 SA9 O
23 IRQ5 I 23 SA8 O
24 IRQ4 I 24 SA7 O
25 IRQ3 I 25 SA6 O
26 XDACK2 I 26 SA5 O
27 TC O 27 SA4 O
28 BALE O 28 SA3 O
29 1P5 VO 29 SA2 O
30 OSC14 O 30 SA1 O
31 1M VO 31 SA0 O
Signal names
RSTDRV Reset Drive
IRQ[3...7], [9...12, 14.15] Interrupt Requests
DRQ[0...3], [5...7] DMA Requests
XDACK[0...3], [5...7] DMA Acknowledge
XZEROWS 0 Wait State
XSMEMR Memory Read to 1MB
XSMEMW Memory Write to 1MB
XMEMR Memory Read
XMEMW Memory Write
XIOR IO Read
XIOW IO Write
AEN Address Enable
XIOCHECK IO Channel Check
IOCHRDY IO Channel Ready
XMASTER Master
XIOCS16 IO Chip Select 16
XMEMCS16 Memory Chip Select 16
XSBHE Byte High Enable
BALE Bus Address Latch
XREFRESH Memory Refresh
TC Terminal Count
SYSCLK Bus Clock 8.33MHz
OSC14 14.31818MHz
SD[0...15] System Data Bus
SA[0...19] System Address Bus
LA[17...23] System Address Bus
(not stored)
1P5 +5V
1P12 +12V
1N12 12V
1M Signal Ground
1N5 5V
Signal type
B Bidirectional
O Output
VO Voltage Output
I Input
Memory
address ranges
Table 18-4 Memory address ranges in the MMC
Interrupt The table below shows the interrupt requests (IRQs) and the possible assign-
assignment MMC ment for a PCI adapter or a PC card adapter. In this case, Prio 0 stands for the
highest priority.
Note
For the MMC 103, IRQ11 and 15 are reserved in the BIOS setup for external
cards.
I/O address ranges The external card I/O address ranges are as follows
for the MMC
(PC/AT)
Table 18-6 I/O address ranges in the PCI adapter
Dimension
drawing
157.2
Clamping screw3)
Clamping piece (2x)3) (Ejot PT, K30-10, 2x)
X153
X151
SIN 840D operator panel
X221
X220
X3
X4
2291)
6)
136 2)
4)
X122
X123
X121
Installing a
PCI card
Warning
! S PCI cards must be installed by properly qualified personnel only. Regula-
tions for handling electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD) must be obser-
ved.
S Shut off the complete system. Check for zero potential and secure against
unauthorized energizing.
Danger
! The operator panel front must be switched off when installing PCI cards.
Notes
Function block 3.5 floppy disk drive including connecting cables for connection to the MMC
101/102/103 (length: max. of 0.5m).
Dimension
drawings 145
50
48.6 185
1 2 3
185
17
M3 fixing screw
max. screw-in depth: 4mm Ribbon cable socket connector (34-pin)
M4 shield
Ground connection
connector
X111 X121
(unassigned) (power supply interface)
X1
Pin Name Type
1 P24 V VI
2 M VI
3 PE VI
Signal names
P24 external +24VDC
M external Ground
PE Protective conductor
Signal type
VI Voltage Input
Installation
M3 fixing screw
instructions max. screw-in depth: 4mm
133.8
6
3.6 R3
42 25 32 38.7
112
118
130
!
Important
The floppy disk drive can be installed in any position except upside down:
Connecting floppy The floppy disk drive must be connected to the X9 interface of the
disk drive MMC 101/102.
D12 X8 SIEMENS
S1 X3
X121X122
S2
X7 X6 X5 X4
X11
X9
Technical data
Electrical data
Input voltage 24VDC
Power consumption max. 5W
Mechanical data
Dimensions Height Width Depth
50mm 145mm 185mm
Environmental conditions
Temperature ranges Installed/in operation Storage/transport
Limit values 5...55C 20 ... 60C
Temperature changes within 1 minute max. 0.2K
Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5
within 1 minute max. 0.1%
Type 3.5
Capacity 1.44MB
Weight Approx. 0.8kg
Vibratory load 1.5G 10 to 100Hz
capacity 1.0G 100 to 200Hz
0.5G 200 to 600Hz
Dimension A
drawing of
blanking plate 138.50.1
49.90.2
44.2
SIEMENS
11)
5.5
3
0
0 R1.5
3 B 144.80.2
5.5 139.1
Section A B
7
10 degrees
_______
1) all around
2.4+0.1
2.5
5
8.50.1 0
5.5
3.5
Notes
S Microcontroller
S Program memory
S Data memory
S 64 inputs/48 outputs (5V, no electrical isolation)
S Voltage monitor
S Temperature monitor
S Watch dog timer
S Isolated operator panel front interface (MPI)
Baud rate SINUMERIK 840D/810D: 1.5 Mbaud
Baud rate SINUMERIK FM-NC: 187.5 kbaud.
Fig. 20-1 View (example: machine control panel 6FC5 203-0AF22-1AA0; milling version)
LEDs Keyboard
48 outputs 64 inputs
Isolated MPI
X20
Serial I/O 9 5
Controller controller
6 1
9-pin
Sub-D
2P5 socket
X10
Monitoring:
voltage, tempera- Program memory Data memory 5V
ture, watchdog
24V P24
5V
1P5
T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3
X Y Z
T4 T5 T6 R4 R5 R6
[.] 1 4 5 6
T7 T8 T9 R7 R8 R9
10 100 7 8 9 % %
T10 T11 T12 R10 R11 R12
WCS
1000 10000 MCS
T13 T14 T15 R13 R14 R15
+
A B C D E F G H I
T1 T2 T3 R1 R2 R3
+Y +X +C
T4 T5 T6 R4 R5 R6
[.] 1 Z +Z
T7 T8 T9 R7 R8 R9
10 100 C X Y % %
T10 T11 T12 R10 R11 R12
WCS
1000 10000 MCS
T13 T14 T15 R13 R14 R15
Overview of
control elements S 64 inputs (30 keys, two rotary selector switches, keyswitch with four posi-
tions)
Description of
control elements
Machine Manufacturer
For further or different reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP:
See machine tool manufacturers instructions!
Circuit for
EMERGENCY
STOP button
2 4
EMERGENCY
STOP button
1 3
Connect cable to
1 3 4 2 button
Terminal
EMERGENCY STOP
machine control
20.3.2 Interfaces
1 2 3 4
X20 ON
3 1
S3
4 2
X10
Power supply
interface X10
Operator panel front S3 switch EMERGENCY
interface (MPI) X20 STOP button
1 2 3
SHIELD M24 P24
Interface overview
S X20: Operator panel front interface (MPI)
Socket: 9-pin female Sub-D connector strip, straight
S LEDs 1...4:
LED1: Not used
LED2: Not used
LED3: POWER: 24V supply
LED4: SEND: status change on protocol transmission.
X20
Pin Name Type Pin Name Type
1/2 Unassigned 6 2P5 VO
3 RS_OPI B 7 Unassigned
4 RTSAS_OPI O 8 XRS_OPI B
5 2M VO 9 RTSPG_OPI I
Signal names
RS_OPI, XRS_OPI Differential RS485 data OPI
RTSPG_OPI Request to Send PG OPI
RTSAS_OPI Request to Send PLC OPI
2M Signal Ground, isolated
2P5 +5V, isolated
Signal type
B Bidirectional
O Output
VO Voltage Output
I Input
X10
Pin Name Type
1 SHIELD
2 M24 VI
3 P24
Signal names
SHIELD Shield terminal
P24 24V potential
M24 24V ground
Signal type
VI Voltage Input
4.8 +0,1
155
146.2
4)
8.8
0
241.2
482.6
473.6
357.4
125
8.8
0
500
1)
4)
> 60
46.3
Front
mounting
Mounting
42
plane
Rear
mounting
3)
Detail
2)
Front
M4 welding stud
without flange
1) Necessary clearance
2) M4 fixing bolt with DIN 125 washer, enclosed as loose part
3) Permitted mounting position max. 75C to the perpendicular (see note)
4) M5 grounding connector
Fig. 20-7 Dimension drawing of machine control panel (version 6FC5 203-0AD10-0AA0 / 6FC5 203-0AD12-0AA0)
Note
For mounting positions greater than 60C a fan must additionally be installed to
keep the environmental conditions of the machine control panel constantly be-
low 55C.
20.4.1 Installation
3)
137.4"0.2
129.7+0.5
4.3 or M4
7.70.5
0
+0.5
7.7 0.5
464.8 0.2
116.2 0.2
232.4 0.2
348.6 0.2
0
1.5
457.1
1.0/100 2)
Fig. 20-8 Panel cutout for machine control panels 6FC5 203-0AD10-0AA0 and 6FC5 203-0AD12-0AA0
Tension jack The machine control panel 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0 is attached using tension
attachment jacks (see Fig. 20-9).
Control
Mounting base
panel Tension 1.5 to 6
1.56 thick
jacks
132.5 132.5
482.6
Max.
torque
0.5Nm
Fig. 20-9 Panel cutout for machine control panel 6FC5 203-0AF22-1AA0
20.4.2 Connection
Connecting the The 24V supply is connected to the X10 connector at the rear of the machine
24V supply control panel via a 3-pin terminal block (see Fig. 20-6). The equipotential bond-
ing conductor is fixed by means of an M5 screw.
MPI connection The machine control panel is connected to the OPI on the NCU (X101) using an
(X20) MPI bus cable via the MMC interface (X4) or the PCU interface (MPI/DP). The
MPI connector is plugged into X20 on the rear of the machine control panel (see
Fig. 20-6) and fixed with a screw.
Assignments The following settings are possible with the S3 DIP switch (see Fig. 20-6):
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning
Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud / Transmission cycle time: 100 msecs
ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
Bus address: 6 / serial hardware
Setting the The PLC expects a message frame from the machine control panel at least ev-
transmission ery 500 msecs. The machine control panel sends a message frame to the PLC
cycle time at cyclic intervals when no key is pressed. This cycle time is set with S3 DIP
switches 2 and 3. This enables the load on the PLC resulting from the machine
control panel to be adjusted.
Setting the The machine control panel receives message frames at cycle intervals from the
receipt PLC and answers these at cycle intervals. The receipt monitoring time is linked
cycle time to the transmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with the
S3 DIP switch (2 and 3).
Bus address The bus address must be set to the value 6. Any other setting will be ignored by
the software.
Electrical data
Input voltage 24VDC
Power consumption
5W
(max.)
Degree of protection to
DIN EN 60529 (IEC Front side: IP 54 Rear side: IP 00
60529)
Mechanical data
Dimensions Height Width Depth
155mm 483mm 47mm
Weight approx. 0.5kg
Basic color of casing Anthracite, acc. to SN 47030, Part 2, Color code: 614
Environmental conditions
Temperature ranges Installed/in operation Storage/transport
Front side: 0, ..., 55C
Limit values 20 ..., 60C
20,
Rear side: 0, ..., 45C
Temperature change within 1 minute max. 0.2K
Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5
within 1 minute max. 0.1%
The following sets of key caps with blank labels are available for machine con-
trol panel No. 6FC5 203-0AD10-0AA0:
Table 20-6 Key caps for machine control panel 6FC5 203-0AD10-0AA0
The slide-in label film shown in Fig. 20-10 can be ordered under the number
6FC5 248-0AF22-0AA0 and printed with user-specific labels.
Distance from
edge of film
32
2.32
5
4
15.05
14
4
15.05
1)
11
14
4
15.05
14
2)
115
4
15.05
4
46.8
15
4
15.05
4
15.05
4
15.05
4
15.05
4
35
190
1) Labeling area for 6FC5 203-0AD12-0AA0 2) Labeling area for 6FC5 203-0AF22-1AA0
Fig. 20-10 Slide-in label film for machine control panel 6FC5 203-0AD12-0AA0 and 6FC5 203-0AF22-1AA0,
A4 format for laser printers, with transparent windows for LEDs (without lines or text/numbers)
MPI interface A customer operator panel can be connected via the MPI interface. For this pur-
pose, 64 digital inputs and 64 digital outputs with CMOS level (5V) are available
on the module.
Position of
interfaces
289.4
64.7
7.2
207.3
Fig. 20-11 Front view of MPI interface for customer operator panel
X10
Pin Name Type
1 SHIELD
2 M24 VI
3 P24
Signal names
SHIELD Shield terminal
P24 24V potential
M24 24V ground
Signal type
VI Voltage Input
Note
The maximum length of the equipotential bonding cable (fine-core, 10 mm2) is
30cm.
X20
Pin Name Type Pin Name Type
1/2 Unassigned 6 2P5 VO
3 RS_OPI B 7 Unassigned
4 RTSAS_OPI O 8 XRS_OPI B
5 2M VO 9 RTSPG_OPI I
Signal names
RS_OPI, XRS_OPI Differential RS485 data OPI
RTSPG_OPI Request to Send PG OPI
RTSAS_OPI Request to Send PLC OPI
2M Signal Ground, isolated
2P5 +5V, isolated
Signal type
B Bidirectional
O Output
VO Voltage Output
I Input
Note
The inputs/outputs are assigned CMOS level (5V). The outputs are not short-
circuit-proof. Applying a higher voltage to the inputs will destroy them.
Potential pins:
The inputs/outputs (interfaces X211, X221, X231) can be loaded with a maxi-
mum current of 0.2A via the internal 5V power supply of the MPI interface mod-
ule. This value stands for the total of all currents flowing over these interfaces.
X211
Pin Name Type Pin Name Type
1 Unassigned 33 IN 39
2 OUT 47 34 IN 45
3 OUT 46 35 IN 38 I
4 OUT 45 36 IN 44
5 OUT 44 37 IN 37
O
6 OUT 43 38 M V
7 OUT 42 39 IN 36
8 OUT 41 40 IN 43
9 OUT 40 41 IN 35
10 M V 42 IN 42
11 Unassigned 43 IN 34 I
12 IN 63 I 44 IN 41
13 P5 V 45 IN 33
14 IN 62 46 IN 40
15 IN 55 47 IN 32
16 IN 61 48 M V
I
17 IN 54 49 OUT 39
18 IN 60 50 OUT 38
19 IN 53 51 OUT 37
20 M V 52 OUT 36
21 IN 52 53 OUT 35
22 IN 59 54 OUT 34
23 IN 51 55 OUT 33
24 IN 58 56 OUT 32
O
25 IN 50 57 OUT 31
I
26 IN 57 58 OUT 30
27 IN 49 59 OUT 29
28 IN 56 60 OUT 28
29 IN 48 61 OUT 27
30 IN 47 62 OUT 26
31 P5 V 63 OUT 25
32 IN 46 I 64 OUT 24
X231
Pin Name Type Pin Name Type
1 OUT 48 11 OUT 56
2 OUT 49 12 OUT 57
3 OUT 50 13 OUT 58
4 OUT 51 14 OUT 59
O O
5 OUT 52 15 OUT 60
6 OUT 53 16 OUT 61
7 OUT 54 17 OUT 62
8 OUT 55 18 OUT 63
9/10 M V 19/20 P5 V
Signal names
OUT 0 ..63 Outputs
IN 0 .. 63 Inputs
P5 5V power supply
M 0V
Signal type
O Output
I Input
V Voltage
Signal description
OUT 0 OUT 63: Output signals with C-MOS level 5V max. 5mA.
IN 0 IN 63: CMOS inputs with 5V level
Note
OUT 0 to OUT 47:
are switched over at cyclic intervals between 5V and 0V level after POWER
ON. After booting of the control, these outputs can be triggered via the PLC.
OUT 48 to OUT 63:
are set to 5V level after POWER ON (connection and triggering of relay pos-
sible). After booting of the control, these outputs can be triggered via the PLC.
IN 0 to 63:
5V > FALSE status seen from the PLC
0V > TRUE status seen from the PLC
Assignments The following settings are possible with the S3 DIP switch (see Fig. 20-11):
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning:
Table 20-10 MPI interface for customer operator panel, default settings of S3 for 840D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning:
ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud
Transmission cycle time:
100 msecs
Bus address: 6
MPI interface for customer ope-
rator panel
Table 20-10 MPI interface for customer operator panel, default settings of S3 for
FM NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning:
OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON Baud rate: 187.5 kbaud
Transmission cycle time:
100 msecs
Bus address: 6
MPI interface for customer op-
erator panel
Setting the The PLC expects a message frame from the interface module at least every
transmission 500 msecs. If no key is pressed, the interface module sends message frames to
cycle time the PLC at cyclic intervals. The S3 switches (2 and 3) are used to set this cycle
time. In this way, the load on the PLC caused by the interface module can be
adjusted.
Setting the The machine control panel receives message frames at cycle intervals from the
receipt PLC and answers these at cycle intervals. The receipt monitoring time is linked
cycle time to the transmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with the
S3 DIP switch (2 and 3).
Bus address The bus address must be set to the value 6. Any other setting will be ignored by
the software.
Table 20-11 Technical data of MPI interface for customer operator panel
Electrical data
Total current 24V
Typical 100mA
Mechanical data
Dimensions Height Width Depth
92mm 293mm 15mm
Weight 0.5kg
Environmental conditions
Temperature ranges Installed/in operation Storage/transport
Limit values 0, ..., 55C 40, ..., 70C
Degree of protection IP 00 to DIN 40 050
Humidity rating F Permissible humidity to DIN 40 040
Table 20-12 Correlation between MPI bus address and GD parameters with machine
control panel
Transmitting
Machine
AS 314
(PLC)
Receiving
Fig. 20-12 Receiving and transmitting from view of machine control panel
77
A A
SIEMENS
K
B
C J
D
%
405060
I
30 70
E 20 80
90
10
F 0 110100
252
114 110
Key symbols The key symbols are on a slide-in label that can be changed as necessary.
The labeling strip is located between the PCB and the front of the housing and
can be accessed from the right.
Magnetic clamp The magnetic clamp is not intended for permanent fixing of the HHU to the per-
pendicular sheet metal parts.
Caution
! S The HHU cannot be connected using the MPI cable 6FX2002-4EA04-IAF0
(or other lengths), since the bus terminators are integral components of this
cable.
Please use the MPI cable specified in the catalog
References: /Z/ Catalog NCZ.
S If the connection between the HHU and the distributor box is interrupted
(HHU cable pulled out), an emergency stop is triggered. There is no auto-
matic EMERGENCY STOP overriding.
HHU variants The handheld unit and the distributor are offered in two wiring versions.
1. In the version with 2-channel enable keys and 3-core connection of these
keys.
2. In the version with 2-channel enable keys and 4-core connection of these
keys.
In this version, monitoring for cross short-circuit in the enable circuit is pos-
sible.
Due to modified connector design, these HHUs can only be operated on the
distributor designed for the corresponding mode. In the version with 4-core con-
nection of the enable keys, the connector insert of the connector is arranged
coded at an angle of 45_ to avoid destruction of the unit by accidental wrong
connection.
HHU
MPI bus
LEDs Keys Digital
display
Conn.
MPI Distribu-
submodule tor box
DIP switches
S EMERGENCY
STOP
S Enabling button
EMER-
GENCY S Handwheel pulses
Rotary switch Keyswitch STOP Hand- Enabling
wheel buttons S 24VDC
Fig. 21-2 Block diagram of HHU and distributor box
Connecting to The HHU is connected to the distributor box, connector X4. The EMERGENCY
distributor box STOP button, enabling buttons and handwheel signals are not transmitted to
the PLC but decoupled in the distributor box terminal block X3. Power supply to
the HHU is via the distributor box. All other signals are transmitted to the PLC
via the MPI/OPI bus.
Note
Purpose Trouble-free plugging and unplugging of the HHU during machine operation
requires:
ON ON ON
HHU
RS-485 repeater
OFF ON
Terminating resistor open
Repeater RS-485 The repeater can be ordered under the number 6ES7 972-0AA00-0XA0.
For further information, please refer to the Catalog
/IK10/ Industrial Communication Networks SIMATIC-NET.
Note
A keyswitch with two positions and two contacts must be installed at each HHU
connection point.
Keyswitch 1) with
positive-action contacts
24V
Keyswitch = ON
Signal to PLC
triggers a timer. If
the signal level is still
low after the moni-
toring period
(approx. 5min), the
M PLC must initiate an
1 11 12 2 9 10 EMERGENCY
X3
P (24V) M (0V) STOP
EMERGENCY
STOP button
Fig. 21-4 Sample circuit for emergency stop override (illustration shows keyswitch set to ON with HHU connected)
Note
Please note that the customer is responsible for implementing the sample cir-
cuits.
Danger
! EMERGENCY STOP switches that are inactive
Purpose If more than two HHUs are to be connected to a bus segment, or if the HHU
cannot be connected at the end of the bus, a PROFIBUS repeater is recom-
mended for the connection of the HHUs.
OFF OFF
NCU/ ON OFF
MPI/OPI
CCU
ON
OFF
MCP
Distributor
Distributor box box
HHU HHU
RS-485 repeater
OFF ON ON
Terminating resistor open
Repeater RS 485 The repeater can be ordered under Order No. 6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0. For fur-
ther information, please refer to the Catalog
/IK10/ Industrial Communication Networks SIMATIC-NET.
Note
S If HHUs are connected to the ends of the bus, the repeaters may be omitted
since the HHU already contains an installed bus terminating resistor.
S The cable length from the repeater to the distributor box must not exceed
2m.
S Cable lengths for MPI/OPI, see /IAD/ Start-Up Guide 840D or /IAC/ Start-Up
Guide 810D, Chapter 3.
For further information about simultaneous operation of several HHUs on one
NCU, please refer to the Description of Functions, Basic Machine, Part 1,
Chapter Basic PLC Program (P3), Section Configurability of machine control
panel, handheld unit, subheading Switchover of MPI, OPI address.
Machine Manufacturer
For further or different reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP:
See machine tool manufacturers instructions!
X4
11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 X3
Distributor
box 2.1 2.2 1.1 1.2 A A B B ZS1 ZS2 24V 0V COM
EMERGENCY STOP
Fig. 21-6 Internal circuit of EMERGENCY STOP button, handwheel, enabling buttons
3-core
Internal circuit of
EMERGENCY STOP button Handwheel Enabling button
HHU and
distributor box
with 4-core
connection of the HHU
enable keys
X4
11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 X3
Distributor
box 2.1 2.2 1.1 1.2 A A B B ZS ZS 24V 0V ZS ZS KEY2
1.1 2.1 2.2 1.2
EMERGENCY STOP
Fig. 21-7 Internal circuit of EMERGENCY STOP button, handwheel, enabling buttons
4-core
Enabling buttons The enabling buttons are designed as 2-position switches and are located at
the left and right of the handheld unit. The keys are NO contacts and connected
in parallel. They are two-channel keys. Connection 3- or 4-core, depending on
type. A 4-core connection allows cross short-circuit monitoring in the enable
circuit.
24V/2A contact load.
Handwheel The electronic handwheel supplies two tracks with rectangular signal. The sig-
nals can be tapped from the distributor box and taken to the NCU connector
X121 via the cable distributor.
Keys 20 keys are transmitted to the PLC and are freely assignable by the user.
The labeling symbols can be changed (unscrew HHU).
Digital display 2-tier digital display, each with 16 characters controlled via the PLC.
Connecting cable The HHU is connected to the distributor box via the connecting cable (either a
coiled cable with max. length 3.5m or a 10m connecting cable).
Interface to The EMERGENCY STOP button and the enable keys, as well as handwheel
distributor box signals and power supply are connected to terminal block X3.
Electrical data
Power supply 24V
Power consumption approx. 250mA
EMERGENCY STOP button 24V 2A NC contact
Enabling buttons designed as 24V 2A 2 parallel NO
2-position switches contacts
Electrical handwheel 2 tracks 500mA TTL level
General data
Keyswitch 2 positions ON/OFF
Override switch 12 positions
Connecting cable 3.5m or 10m long
Mechanical data
Dimensions Height Width Depth
252mm 114mm 110mm
Weight 1.2kg without connecting cable
Environmental conditions
Temperature ranges Installed/in op- Storage/trans-
eration port
0 ... 55C 20 ... 60C
Temperature change within 1 minute max. 0.2K
Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5
within 1 minute max. 0.1%
Degree of protection IP 65
Displaying The software version of the HHU is displayed after booting as long as the HHU
software version is not communicating with the PLC.
of HHU
Example: Display of HHU
Waiting for PLC
V04.01.01 F / 1.5 M *)
DIP switches To set the bus parameters and the IDLE time, two quadruple DIP switches are
provided on the basic module of the HHU.
The HHU must be opened for access to the DIP switches.
Note
Open the device only if the HHU connector has been previously
removed!
Switch settings
Setting the baud
ON OFF rate and bus address ON OFF
S1 via DIP via S1
4 switches display *) 4
3 1.5 Mbaud 3
Switch position
2 without function 2
ON OFF IDLE time
4 100 msecs
3 1 1
S1 2
1
4
S2 3
2 S2 S2
1 4 4
3 Bus 3
Switch position
address
without function
2 15 2
1 1
____________________________
*) SW 04.01.01 and higher
Meaning of DIP
switches
Table 21-2 S1 and S2 assignments in the HHU
Meaning S1 S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 S2 S2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
via display
Setting the ON
(SW 4.1.1 only)
baud rate and
bus address via DIP switches (all
OFF
SW versions)
IDLE time *) 100msecs OFF ON
1.5 Mbaud ON
Baud rate *)
187.5 kbaud OFF
Bus address *) 15 ON ON ON ON
14 ON ON ON OFF
13 ON ON OFF ON
12 ON ON OFF OFF
11 ON OFF ON ON
10 ON OFF ON OFF
9 ON OFF OFF ON
8 ON OFF OFF OFF
7 OFF ON ON ON
6 OFF ON ON OFF
5 OFF ON OFF ON
4 OFF ON OFF OFF
3 OFF OFF ON ON
2 OFF OFF ON OFF
1 OFF OFF OFF ON
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
Note
S With switch position S1.4 = on and software version w V04.01.01, bus ad-
dresses from 0 to 31 can be set, i.e. up to 32 nodes can be supported on
the OPI/MPI.
via the operator interface of the HHU using the key combination Jog (top
T2
left outside) and T2 (top right outside). You are then prompted via the
display of the HHU to enter the individual parameters via the HHU keyboard.
The default values can be modified within the permissible value ranges using
the + or keys.
Switching on to the next parameter is effected by operating the automatic key
. The parameters are stored in the flash EPROM by advancing after the
last parameter. Setting is therefore only required on startup and when changing
the interface. If interface parameter assignment is not activated after power On,
the stored values are accepted or the default values (see table) are loaded.
Transmitting
AS 315
HHU (PLC)
Receiving
Note
The GD parameters of the HHU and AS315 or PLC block FB1/0B100 must be
set identically.
PLC module The FC13 HHUDisp supports operation of the LCD display. For a detailed de-
scription, please refer to:
Note
The customer is responsible for programming the transfer of key signals to the
interface in a PLC user program.
Input image of You can tap the signals for the keys, feedrate override switch, keyswitch and
handheld unit acknowledgment of the digital display at the input area. The address range is
set by parameter assignment with STEP7 tools.
Byte
Input signals to PLC
No.
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IB Reserved Reserved
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
m
IB Reserved Reserved
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
m+1
Feed Key un- AUTO- Spindle Feed Key un-
IB NC stop JOG
start assigned MATIC stop stop assigned
m+2 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1
Key un- Hand- Key un- Key un- Key un- Key un- Spindle
IB NC start
assigned wheel assigned assigned assigned assigned start
m+3 T16 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9
Tx = 1 Key pressed
Output image of The signals for controlling the LEDs, HHU mode, display signals and digital dis-
handheld unit play are present at the output area.
L1 L6 L11 L2
L3 L8 L12 L7
L4 L9 L13 L16
Byte
Output signals to HHU
No.
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
QB
1
m
New data
QB for se-
Selection
m+1 lected line line
QB
L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
m+2
QB
L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9
m+3
Lx = 1 LED lights up
Byte
Output signals to HHU
No.
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Note
The value of the output byte QBm bit 7 must always be 1!
This sets the output mode of the display.
Display The digital display is used as a 2-line alphanumeric display with 16 digits per
line.
The display data are coded according to the character set given in the table
ASCII code of digital display via the QBm + 4...19 bytes. The decimal point re-
quires a digit of its own. The display always starts line by line right-justified with
the byte QBm + 4 and is built up towards the left up to QBm + 19.
Example Example of a signal chart when writing data for two lines
signal chart
1. Selecting the line with QBm + 1, bit 0.
2. Writing new data with QBm + 4...19.
3. Set request: new data for selected line QBm + 1, bit 7.
4. Acknowledgment digital display IBm + 5, bit 7, via system.
5. Reset request.
Note
The request must be reset before a new line is written.
1 Lower line
1. Selecting the line
Upper line
0
1
3. Request: New data b b
0
a a
c c
d d
1
4. Acknowledgement digital display
0
a: PLC user sets signal and waits for acknowledgment
b: System sets acknowledgment
c: User resets request
d: System resets acknowledgment
Fig. 21-13 Signal chart example for writing data into the HHU display
Charac- Hex Bit pattern Charac- Hex Bit pattern Charac- Hex Bit pattern
ter ter ter
SPACE 20 0010 0000 @ 40 0100 0000 60 0110 0000
! 21 0010 0001 A 41 0100 0001 a 61 0110 0001
22 0010 0010 B 42 0100 0010 b 62 0110 0010
# 23 0010 0011 C 43 0100 0011 c 63 0110 0011
$ 24 0010 0100 D 44 0100 0100 d 64 0110 0100
% 25 0010 0101 E 45 0100 0101 e 65 0110 0101
& 26 0010 0110 F 46 0100 0110 f 66 0110 0110
27 0010 0111 G 47 0100 0111 g 67 0110 0111
( 28 0010 1000 H 48 0100 1000 h 68 0110 1000
) 29 0010 1001 I 49 0100 1001 i 69 0110 1001
* 2A 0010 1010 J 4A 0100 1010 j 6A 0110 1010
+ 2B 0010 1011 K 4B 0100 1011 k 6B 0110 1011
, 2C 0010 1100 L 4C 0100 1100 l 6C 0110 1100
2D 0010 1101 M 4D 0100 1101 m 6D 0110 1101
. 2E 0010 1110 N 4E 0100 1110 n 6E 0110 1110
/ 2F 0010 1111 O 4F 0100 1111 o 6F 0110 1111
0 30 0011 0000 P 50 0101 0000 p 70 0111 0000
1 31 0011 0001 Q 51 0101 0001 q 71 0111 0001
2 32 0011 0010 R 52 0101 0010 r 72 0111 0010
3 33 0011 0011 S 53 0101 0011 s 73 0111 0011
4 34 0011 0100 T 54 0101 0100 t 74 0111 0100
5 35 0011 0101 U 55 0101 0101 u 75 0111 0101
6 36 0011 0110 V 56 0101 0110 v 76 0111 0110
7 37 0011 0111 W 57 0101 0111 w 77 0111 0111
8 38 0011 1000 X 58 0101 1000 x 78 0111 1000
9 39 0011 1001 Y 59 0101 1001 y 79 0111 1001
: 3A 0011 1010 Z 5A 0101 1010 z 7A 0111 1010
; 3B 0011 1011 [ 5B 0101 1011 { 7B 0111 1011
< 3C 0011 1100 \ 5C 0101 1100 | 7C 0111 1100
= 3D 0011 1101 ] 5D 0101 1101 } 7D 0111 1101
> 3E 0011 1110 ^ 5E 0101 1110 ~ 7E 0111 1110
? 3F 0011 1111 _ 5F 0101 1111 DEL 7F 0111 1111
Versions of the The distributor box is available both in standard version and in a UL-certified
distributor box version. In conjunction with the UL-certified distributor box, HHU and HPU are
UL-certified for USA and Canada. Both variants of the distributor box are me-
chanically installation-compatible and electrically connection-compatible.
The distributor must be designed for 3-core or 4-core connection of the enable
keys, depending on the HHU used.
Connecting the The 24VDC power supply is connected to terminal block X3, terminals 9 and 10.
24VDC power
supply
Installing the The HHU is connected to the X4 screw connection on the distributor box. When
distributor box drilling a hole (e.g. into a housing) for the X4 screw terminal, the requirements of
degree of protection IP54 must be complied with.
Connecting the The distributor box is connected to the relevant interface (e.g. to the MPI bus for
MPI bus or OPI FM-NC, 810D, 840D or to the OPI possible only for 840D) via the X5 MPI bus
connection.
Connecting the The first channel of the EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to the X3 ter-
EMERGENCY minal block, terminals 1 and 2.
STOP button The second channel of the EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to terminal
block X3, terminals 11 and 12.
Connecting the The electronic handwheel can be connected to terminal block X3, terminals 3 to
handwheel 6. If the handwheel is to be connected to the NCU, a connection must be made
to the cable distributor.
Enabling buttons The enabling buttons are connected to terminal block X3.
connection
Caution
! The 2nd channel of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit may be connected only if a
2-channel handheld unit is used.
Order No.: 6FX2007-1AC01 or 6FX2007-1AC11 and
6FX2007-1AC02 or 6FX2007-1AC12 and
6FX2007-1AC03 or 6FX2007-1AC13.
Position of
Front view Side view
interfaces and
100 36.5 34
terminals 90
X1
X5
X2
Equipotential 120 20
bonding X4 110
connection X3
10.5
X1 and X2 exist only in the version 3-core connection of the enable buttons.
X3/terminals 14/15 exist only in the version 4-core connection of the enable
buttons.
X4 HHU interface
Connector designation X4
Type of connector Circular screw-type connector
Special characteristics Interface according to IP54
Signal names
EMERGENCY STOP button
EMERGENCY STOP button
Protective conductor
Enabling button
Enabling button
+24V
0V
Handwheel track A
Handwheel track A
Handwheel track B
Handwheel track B
MPI bus lines
X5 MPI interface
Connector designation X5
Connector type 9-pin Sub-D socket connector
Max. cable length 200m
Special feature Electrical isolation
Table 21-8 X5 pin assignments
X5
Pin Name Type Pin Name Type
1 Unassigned 6 P5 VO
2 Unassigned 7 Unassigned
3 RS_KP B 8 XRS_KP B
4 RTSAS_KP O 9 RTSPG_KP I
5 M VO
Signal names
RS_KP, XRS_KP Differential RS485 data C bus from PLC
RTSAS_KP AS Request to Send communication bus
from PLC
RTSPG_KP PG Request to Send communication bus
from PLC
M Ground
P5 5V
Signal type
B Bidirectional
O Output
VO Voltage Output
I Input
EMC measures The interference currents are earthed via the shield plates. To prevent these
discharged currents from becoming a source of interference themselves, make
sure that the path of the interference currents to earth is of low-resistance.
S Securely tighten all fixing screws of cable connectors, modules and cables
referred to a potential.
S Make sure that all contacting areas of cables referred to a potential are pro-
tected against corrosion.
S Cables referred to a potential should have a length of less than 30cm and a
cross-section of 10mm2.
For detailed description, see Prodis, article no. 490 700 4 dated 18.5.2000.
Order address
Euchner GmbH + Co
Vertrieb Technik
Kohlhammerstr. 16
D-70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen
Germany
Phone: ++49-(0)711-7597-0
Fax: ++49-(0)711-7597-303
J
Notes
20 60 108
F
E
216
H
D
B
I C
88 83.5
22.1.1 General
The mini handheld unit (Mini HHU) is a small easy-to-handle unit for setting up
and operating simple machines in the JobShop area or similar applications.
Special attention has been paid to ergonomics and logical operating in the de-
sign of the housing and the arrangement of the control elements.
The Mini HHU is intended for connection to 810D and 840D controls. It can also
be used with the 840C and FM-NC.
Enabling button The enabling button is designed as a 2-way switch. It must be pressed to initiate
traversing movements.
Axis selection The axis selection switch can be used to select up to five axes.
switch
Function keys The function keys can be used to trigger machine-specific functions.
Traversing keys The +, traversing keys can be used to trigger traversing movements at the
axis selected using the axis selection switch.
Handwheel The handwheel can be used to initiate movements at the axis selected using
the axis selection switch. The handwheel supplies two guide signals with
100 I/U.
Rapid traverse The rapid traverse button can be used to increase the traversing speed of the
button axis selected using the axis selection switch. The rapid traverse button is active
both for traversing commands issued via the +/ keys and for handwheel sig-
nals.
X1
S1 12 22
wh 0.34 mm 2
EMERGENCY STOP
11
br 0.34 mm 2
EMERGENCY STOP/enable circuit
21
gn 0.34 mm 2
3
4 ye 0.34 mm 2
S2
gr 0.34 mm 2
Enabling button
14 24
5
13 23
rs 0.34 mm 2
6
bl 0.34 mm 2
7
S3
A2 1
A2
0ZXY45
C
rd 0.14 mm 2
Axis selection
2
bk 0.14 mm 2
9
4
5
vio 0.14 mm 2
10
8
16 C
4
bl
6
0.14 mm 2
A1 8
A1
+24 VDC +
to PLC
ye-br 0.14 mm 2
16
gr-rs 0.14 mm 2 S1
11
S2
rd-bl 0.14 mm 2
12
S3
wh-gn 0.14 mm 2
13
F1
S4
br-gn 0.14 mm 2
F1
14
2F
S5
wh-ye 0.14 mm 2
2F
15
3F
S6
wh-gr 0.14 mm 2
3F
17
6
B1
B1
Shield
SM
SM
24
gr-br 0.34 mm 2 0V
0V
18 19
0.34 mm 2
5 VDC
wh-rs +5 V
Handwheel
rs-br 0.14 mm 2 /B
/B
20 21 22 23
wh-bl 0.14 mm 2 B
B /A A
br-bl 0.14 mm 2 /A
3
wh-rd 0.14 mm 2 A
2
The mini HHU is connected to the PLC or the connector for handwheels via a
flange socket. There is no need for an additional distributor. The signals are
sent to the NC in parallel without (MPI). The flange socket is contained in the
connection kit.
22.4 Configuration
The FC76 module supplied in the toolbox supports configuration of the mini
HHU. It is located in the toolbox in the BSP_PROG directory in the file
MINI_BHG.EXE. The file is a self-extracting file which also contains the docu-
mentation for the module.
The FC76 contains a standard program for the mini HHU and is valid for use
with SINUMERIK 840D/810D. The program is generally valid and therefore re-
quires several input and output signals when called.
To avoid collisions (caused by simultaneous access to one and the same sig-
nal), the FC2 (NCKPLC interface) that occurs in the basic program must be
processed before the FC76.
22.5 Connection
Connection kit A connection kit that must be ordered separately is required for connection of
the mini HHU. This connection kit contains a 24-way flange socket for installa-
tion at the machine and a dummy plug for overriding the EMERGENCY STOP
circuit when the HHU is not connected.
Connection of The 6FX2002-4AA21-1xx0 cable can be used to connect the handwheel sig-
handwheel signals nals to the NC.
The pin contacts on the cable must be replaced with the socket contacts con-
tained in the connection kit.
Connection in accordance with circuit diagram (see Fig. 22-2).
4 1
9 5
15 10
20 16
24 21
Seal 36.6mm
Note
The crimping tool suggested should be used:
AMP crimping tool No. 169475-1 or 90277-1.
Control elements
Enabling button 1 button: two-channel NO contact
floating
EMERGENCY STOP button 1 button: two-channel NC contact,
floating turn-to-reset
Axis selection switch 5 axes: X, Y, Z, 4, 5 and neutral position
Jog key + Positive traverse direction
Jog key Negative traverse direction
Job key Rapid traverse for job keys and handwheel
Function keys 3 keys: F1, F2, F3
Handwheel 100 I/U
Electrical data
Operating voltage for switch- 24V
ing signals
Operating voltage for hand- 5V
wheel
Power consumption 5V Approx. 90mA
Handwheel signals RS-422
EMERGENCY STOP button 24V 2A NC contact
Enabling button 24V 2A NO contact
General data
Housing Optimum ergonomic casing made of polyamide 6,
intuitive arrangement of control elements
Fastening 2 magnetic clamps
Connecting cable Spiral cable 1.5m; expandable up to 3.5m;
Plug with pin contacts
CE conformity Yes
Mechanical data
Dimensions Height Width Depth
Approx. 250mm 110mm 90mm
Weight Approx. 0.8 kg without connecting cable
Environmental conditions
Temperature ranges Installed/in op- Storage/transport
eration
0 ... 55C 20 ... 60C
Temperature change Within 1 minute max. 0.2K
Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5
Within 1 minute Max. 0.1%
Degree of protection IP 65
Connection kit
Flange socket 24-pin with socket contacts and dummy plug
Dummy for overriding the EMERGENCY STOP circuit
Order address
Fa. R&D Steuerungstechnik GmbH + Co KG
Abteilung Service
Hocksteiner Weg 8795
D-41189 Moenchengladbach
Germany
Phone: ++49-(0)2166-5506-34
Fax: ++49-(0)2166-5506-55
J
Notes
X4
Handheld X3
Terminal (HT 6)
Terminal block
For power supply for the HT 6
Wiring for EMERGENCY STOP on HT 6
HT 6 cable Wiring for enabling key on HT 6
Connections The Handheld Terminal must be connected to the MPI bus as the final node on
the MPI bus. The bus terminating resistors are integrated in the device. The
general rules apply for the MPI bus.
Note
The HT6 cannot be connected using the MPI cable 6FX2002-4EA04-IAF0 (or
other lengths), since the bus terminators are integral components of this cable.
Please use the MPI cable specified in the catalog
References: /Z/ Catalog NCZ.
HT 6 cable
Order No.: 6FX2002... Remarks Suitable distributor
...-1AA83-1jj0 3-core enable cable 6FX2006-1BC01
...-1AA23-1jj0 4-core enable cable 6FX2006-1BH01
Note
Distributor box 6FX2006-1BF00 cannot be used.
Caution
! An EMERGENCY STOP is triggered if the connection between the HT 6 and
the distributor box is interrupted (e.g. the HT 6 cable was unplugged). EMER-
GENCY STOP overriding does not take place automatically (see Section 23.4).
Function blocks of
HT 6 S 80486 DX4 microprocessor
S Memory:
SDRAM 16MB
FLASH 8MB
PC memory card: 8MB FLASH, plugged in externally
S LC display with
5.7 diagonal, monochrome (blue) STN, 320*240 pixels (1/4 VGA),
backlit, variable brightness and contrast
16, ..., 20 lines, 38, ..., 52 characters per line (as configured)
The user interface of the HT 6 visible from the front is shown in Fig. 23-2.
Rear side:
Two enabling Override switch
buttons (with fixed stop)
EMER-
GENCY
STOP
Display X
1
Y
2
Z
3 Traversing keys,
A for configuring and
4 labeling by the cus-
B tomer 1)
Soft keys 5
C
6
Special keys,
Function keys, customer-configur-
for configuring and able
labeling by the cus-
tomer 1)
Connecting cable
Number block The Shift key is used to switch the function of the number block keys between
text and numerical mode. Changeover only becomes effective when the Shift
key is released. In text mode, each key is assigned to several alpha characters.
The required character is selected with Shift + character key.
Machine Manufacturer
For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP, please refer to the machine
tool manufacturers instructions!
The rear of the HT 6 complete with the enabling buttons and the interface cov-
ers is shown in Fig. 23-3.
RS-232 interface
(under the cover)
M5 threaded bushes
for fixing bracket
Interface cover:
PC MEMORY card Enabling button
interface
MF2 keyboard interface
RESET key Belt fastener
(under the cover)
Connecting cable
Enabling button The enabling button is designed as a 2-channel, 2-position switch (see Section
23.3).
In the case of operations that require enabling (e.g. manual traversing within a
danger zone), only one enabling button has to be operated.
Note
Press the enabling button firmly as far as the stop to ensure reliable action.
M5 threaded There are two M5 threaded bushes on the rear of the HT 6 for attaching to a
bushes for fixing fixing bracket supplied by the customer, see following Figure.
brackets For both threads, compliance with the maximum tightening torque of 1.8Nm is
essential to ensure that the bushes are not overloaded.
16
M5
117
Fig. 23-4 M5 threaded bushes for fixing bracket
23.2.2 Interfaces
Signal type
B: Bidirectional I: Input O: Output
VI: Voltage Input VO: Voltage Output
Pin Signal name Signal type Pin Signal name Signal type
1 1M VO 35 1M VO
2 D3 B 36 XCARDDET O
3 D4 B 37 D11 B
4 D5 B 38 D12 B
5 D6 B 39 D13 B
6 D7 B 40 D14 B
7 XCSCARDF O 41 D15 B
8 A10 O 42 XCSCARDF O
9 XOEP O 43 NC
10 A11 O 44 NC
11 A9 O 45 NC
12 A8 O 46 A17 O
13 A13 O 47 A18 O
14 A14 O 48 A19 O
15 XWEP O 49 A20 O
16 NC 50 A21 O
17 1P5 VO 51 1P5 VO
18 VPP VO 52 VPP VO
19 A16 O 53 A22 O
20 A15 O 54 A23 O
21 A12 O 55 A24 O
22 A7 O 56 A25 O
23 A6 O 57 NC
24 A5 O 58 RESET O
25 A4 O 59 NC
26 A3 O 60 NC
27 A2 O 61 XREG O
28 A1 O 62 NC
29 1M VO 63 NC
30 D0 B 64 D8 B
31 D1 B 65 D9 B
32 D2 B 66 D10 B
33 NC 67 NC
34 1M VO 68 1M VO
Explanation
A0, ..., A25: Address 0, ..., 25 B: Bidirectional
D0, ..., 15: Data 0, ..., 15 O: Output VO: Voltage Output
Signal type
I: Input O: Output VO: Voltage Output
RESET button The HT 6 can be booted up again using the RESET button.
The RESET button can be accessed under the interface cover by inserting a
screwdriver into a hole.
Release interface cover:
References for The following manuals are available for the handheld terminal (HT 6):
further reading
References: /BAH/ Operators Guide HT 6
/FBPH/ Function description HT 6
Configuration of the HT 6 user interface
/IAM BE1/ User interface extension
Note
The IP 54 degree of protection is only guaranteed when the interface covers
and the RS-232-C covers are closed.
Distributor box The handheld terminal is connected to a distributor box. The distributor box has
and HT 6 an interface to the MPI bus and a terminal block for connecting the EMER-
GENCY STOP circuit, enabling button circuit, 24V power supply and an equipo-
tential bonding connection.
The following are suggested for the connections
Distribution box (Order No. 6FX2006-1BC01) for 3-core enabling cable
(Order No. 6FX2002-1AA83, see Subsection 23.3.1)
Distribution box (Order No. 6FX2006-1BH01) for 4-core enabling cable
(Order No. 6FX2002-1AA23, see Subsection 23.3.2)
Location of
interfaces and
100 36.5 34
terminal blocks 90
Nameplate
X5 X5
Equipotential
bonding X4
connector 120
X4 110
X3
O26 hole X3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 for M25
connector
10.5
Fig. 23-5 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01: Location of interfaces and terminal blocks
24V supply for the The 24V supply is connected to terminal block X3 (see Fig. 23-6):
HT 6
Terminal 9 Ub
Terminal 10 GND
Connecting the The HT 6 is connected to the X4 screw connection on the distributor box by
HT 6 means of the HT 6 cable.
Note
When drilling a hole (e.g. into a housing) for the X4 screw terminal, the require-
ments of degree of protection IP 54 must be complied with.
MPI bus The distributor box is connected to the appropriate interface via MPI bus termi-
connection nal X5, e.g. on the MPI bus.
Connecting the The EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to terminal block X3 (see
EMERGENCY Fig. 23-6).
STOP button
Terminal Assignment
1 Input
EMERGENCY STOP contact 1
2 Output
11 Input
EMERGENCY STOP contact 2
12 Output
HT 6
5 10 15 9 8 13 3 4 X101
Cable plugs
HT 6 cable
6FX2002-1AA83
X4
Distributor box
6FX2006-1BC01
1 11 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 X3
Table 23-5 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01: X 3 pin assignments for terminal block
Connection for Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection be-
equipotential tween the distributor box and the earth potential.
bonding
EMC measures To ensure that the drained currents do not become a source of interference in
their own right, compliance with the following points is essential:
S Securely tighten all fixing screws of cable connectors, modules and cables
referred to a potential.
S Make sure that all contacting areas of cables referred to a potential are pro-
tected against corrosion.
Location of
interfaces and
terminal blocks
100 36.5 34
90
Nameplate
X5 X5
Equipotential
bonding X4
connector 120
X4 110
X3
O26 hole X3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 for M25
connector
10.5
Fig. 23-7 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: Location of interfaces and terminal blocks
24V power supply The 24V power supply is connected to terminal block X3.
for the HT 6
Terminal 9 Ub
Terminal 10 GND
Connecting the The HT 6 is connected to the X4 screw connection on the distributor box by
HT 6 means of the HT 6 cable.
Note
When drilling a hole (e.g. into a housing) for the X4 screw terminal, the require-
ments of degree of protection IP 54 must be complied with.
MPI bus The distributor box is connected to the appropriate interface via MPI bus termi-
connection nal X5, e.g. on the MPI bus.
Connecting the The EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to terminal block X3 (see
EMERGENCY Fig. 23-8).
STOP button
Terminal Assignment
1 Input
EMERGENCY STOP contact 1
2 Output
11 Input
EMERGENCY STOP contact 2
12 Output
HT 6
5 10 15 9 8 13 3 4 X101
Cable plugs
HT 6 cable
6FX2002-1AA23
X4
Distributor box
6FX2006-1BH01
1 11 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 14 X3
Table 23-8 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: X 3 pin assignments for terminal block
Connection for Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection be-
equipotential tween the distributor box and the earth potential.
bonding
EMC measures To ensure that the drained currents do not become a source of interference in
their own right, compliance with the following points is essential:
S Securely tighten all fixing screws of cable connectors, modules and cables
referred to a potential.
S Make sure that all contacting areas of cables referred to a potential are pro-
tected against corrosion.
ON ON ON
Distributor box
Distributor box
HT 6
RS-485 repeater
OFF ON
Terminating resistor open
Repeater RS-485 The repeater can be ordered under Order No. 6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0. For fur-
ther information, please refer to the Catalog
/IK10/ Industrial Communication Networks SIMATIC-NET.
Note
S Cable lengths for MPI/OPI, see /IAD/ Start-Up Guide 840D or /IAC/ Start-Up
Guide 810D, Chapter 3.
24V
Signal to PLC 2)
Keyswitch1)
1 11 12 2 9 10
X3
P (24V) M (0V)
Distributor box
6FX2006-1BC01
10 1 12 9
X4
HT 6
X4 (distributor): 10 1 12 9
EMERGENCY
STOP button
Short-circuit connector
Fig. 23-10 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01: Sample circuit for EMERGENCY STOP override
Note
Please note that the customer is responsible for implementing the sample cir-
cuits.
24V
Signal to PLC 2)
Keyswitch1)
Signal KEY2 to PLC 3)
1 11 12 2 9 15 10
X3
P (24V) M (0V)
Distributor
6FX2006-1BH01
10 1 12 9 4 11
X4
HT 6
X4 (distributor): 4 10 1 12 9 11
EMERGENCY
STOP button
Short-circuit connector
Fig. 23-11 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: Sample circuit for EMERGENCY STOP override
Note
Please note that the customer is responsible for implementing the sample cir-
cuits.
Danger
! EMERGENCY STOP switches that are inactive
Note
Interface parameters are configured using the IK Screen Kit.
Input signals The start address n is set by the parameters in the PLC user program (FB1).
Output signals The start address n is set by the parameters in the PLC user program (FB1).
S MD 12000: OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1
S MD 12020: OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1
S MD 12040: OVR_RAPID_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1
S MD 12060: OVR_SPIND_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1.
S Keyswitch at position 0
S Spindle offset at 0
S Rapid traverse override at 0.
Only parameters BAGNo and ChanNo are provided for FC 26. That is why
the information that is normally transmitted to the caller via the parameters
FeedHold and SpindleHold has to be calculated by the user.
For the default setting of the HT 6, the FB1 call in DB100 available on the basic
program diskette (tool box) must be used.
This call is valid for the first MCP or the HT 6.
This setting corresponds to the hardware of the HT 6 when supplied.
The default setting is:
Parameterization
+ The parameter settings in FB1 for the handheld programming unit correspond to
of basic PLC those of the first MCP:
program (FB1) MCPNum:=1 // one HT 6
MCPIn:=P#E0.0 // HT 6 input signals
MCPOut:=P#Q0.0 // HT 6 output signals
MCPStatRec:=P#Q12.0 // status double word
MCPStatSend:=P#Q8.0 //
MCPMPI:=TRUE //
MCP1BusAdr:=14 //
PLC SW Please note the following when using SW 05.03.04 (for 840D) or SW 03.03.04
(for 810D):
The following must be set while OB 100 is booting:
DB8.DBB2=0 if the HT 6 is configured as the first MCP,
DB8.DBB64=0 if the HT 6 is configured as the second MCP.
This is not necessary with any of the higher SW versions.
Note
The deinstalled keyboard support must be totally protected from soiling, other-
wise the readability of the display and key labels can be permanently affected.
If the inner face becomes dirty, any dirt must be carefully removed using an
Isopropanol cleansing agent or a cellulose cloth soaked in Isopropanol.
Film labels
Override button
Clamping lugs
(2 of 4)
Flat connector
Procedure
1. Deinstall override button in the zero position (Fig. 23-12, left):
Lever off the cover plate with a flat-ended tool (screwdriver),
release expansion screw with screwdriver,
pull knob off the spindle.
2. Depress the four clamping lugs and lever off the keyboard support by insert-
ing a screwdriver in the grooves in the handhold (Fig. 23-12, right).
Slide-in labels can also be made from ordinary paper (80 g/m2).
The dimensions (in mm) can be obtained from Fig. 23-13. The crosses indicate
the center of the text or symbol.
14.7
Electrical data
Power supply 24V via HT 6 cable
Power consumption approx. 500mA
EMERGENCY STOP button 24V 1A 2 NC contacts
Enabling button 24V 1A 2 NO contacts
each
Power loss 12W
General data
Connecting cable Length max. 40m (order by the meter)
Mechanical data
Dimensions Diameter Depth
approx. 290mm approx. 53mm
Ground approx. 1500g
Environmental conditions
Temperature ranges Installed/in op- Storage/transport
eration
0 ... 45C 1) 20 ... +60C
Temperature change max. 0.2K per min.
Change in relative humidity max. 0.1% Class 3K5
per min. according to DIN EN 60721-3-3
Vibration and shock load Class 3M6 according to DIN EN 60721-3-3
Degree of protection IP 54
________________________________________________________
1) At ambient temperatures > 40oC it is recommended that the screen saver is
activated during long periods of inactivity via the display machine data DIS-
PLAY_BLACK_TIME).
J
Notes
!
Important
To calculate the heat dissipation, the total power loss PVtotal of all heat-generat-
ing components in a casing must be taken into account.
Total power loss PVtotal= Pv1 + Pv2 + Pv3 + ...[]
Convection surface A [m2]:
The surfaces of the front and bottom side are not taken into consideration when
calculating the convection surface.
Notes:
The necessary free convection surface area A[m2] of the space to be Air filters must be provided to
enclosed (steel or aluminum sheet, 1.5 mm thick) is calculated, referred to maintain the permissible environ-
a temperature difference T2 T1 = T 10K, approximately from: mental conditions stated in Section
Technical data ....
PVtotal[W] PVtotal[W] Air flow through fan:
A [m2] = 100...165 m3/h
A [m2] = 10 * T [K]
5 T [K]
Note
If the convection area A [m2] is not sufficient for heat dissipation by natural
convection, then heat dissipation by natural convection and internal air
turbulence or heat dissipation by open-circuit cooling or ventilation should be
used.
For hot spots and heat concentration in narrow casings, Heat dissipation by
natural convection and internal air turbulence is recommended.
For thermally critical applications, the total power loss PVtotal can also be deter-
mined as follows:
Current measurement at 24V power supply
Power loss with PVtotal [W] = U (24V) * I (measured in amps).
Calculating power The power loss caused by the components in an operator unit is to be removed
loss PCU 50 by open-circuit ventilation.
The air flow V required for a temperature difference T2 T1 = T 10K must
be calculated.
OP 012 13W
PCU 50 40W
PVtotal = 53W
T1 T2
(max. 180W)
Notes
Compliance with The control system is tested with regard to its compliance with the
connection environmental conditions specified below. Trouble-free operation can only be
conditions guaranteed if
Support and The connection conditions must be satisfied during assembly of the overall
advice system. Please contact your sales partner for support.
Note
Please refer to the documentation for the respective operator components for
information on deviations to the standard connection conditions.
Radio interference Applicable standards: EN 50081-1 and -2, EN 55011, EN 55022, EN 61800-3
suppression
Table 25-1 Limit values for radio interference suppression
Please contact your sales partner for information on compliance with limit class
B (residential areas).
Note
The system operator must consider the interference radiation with respect to
the system as a whole. It is especially important to consider the cable and
wiring. Please contact your sales partner for support.
S static discharge
S radio-frequency radiation
S cable-born interference variables (burst)
S impulse voltages (surge)
S RF energization of cables
S magnetic fields with power frequencies
S voltage dips and interruptions
S voltage fluctuations and flicker
S harmonic currents.
Requirements for The alternating current supply is only required for external devices and acces-
alternating current sories and is not part of the standard scope of delivery.
supply
Table 25-2 Requirements for alternating current supply
Requirements for
direct current
supplies
Warning
! S The direct current is always referred to ground and must not be generated
using an autotransformer.
S With supply lines > 10m, protective elements must be provided at the
device input to protect the device against lightening strike (surge).
S For EMC and functional reasons, the direct current supply must be
connected to ground/shield of the NC. For EMC reasons, the connection
should only be made at one position. Usually this connection is already
provided as standard in the S7-300 I/O devices. If in exceptional cases this
is not the case, the ground connection should be made at the grounding rail
of the NC installation cabinet; see also /EMC/ SINUMERIK, SIROTEC,
SIMODRIVE, EMC installation guideline (06.99).
The overall system comprises user interfaces (UI) and interfaces for service,
start-up and maintenance.
User interfaces UIs are all interfaces which are freely accessible to the machine operator, i.e. no
(UI) tools or other equipment are required. These user interfaces have protective
separation in accordance with EN 60204-1 and EN 50178.
Interfaces for
service/start-up
and maintenance
Warning
! The interfaces for service, start-up and maintenance purposes do not have
protective separation.
Warning
! Protective separation can only be guaranteed if the system configuration speci-
fied below is strictly observed. If additional components (e.g. S7-300 FM, IP)
with UIs are installed, it must be ensured that the UIs have at least basic insula-
tion for 230VAC.
3 AC 400V
Mp
Casing / shield 8
MCP MMC
1
4 11 24V M
4 4 11
2
3 HHU
Distributor box 4 6 7
5
840D / 611D Machine
9
10 S7-300 I/O device
10
M
11
5 Human operator Terminal
block
Basic insulation Protective separation
Fig. 25-1 shows the total potential of the 840D/611D/S7-300 system. Legend:
1. Floating current supply of SIMODRIVE electronics with
basic insulation 230VAC
2. Floating transistor controls of AC rectifier jumper with basic insulation
230VAC
3. Floating transistor controls per axis of AC inverter jumpers with basic insula-
tion 230VAC
4. Floating signal connection from NC to MMC or HHU with basic insulation
230VAC
5. Non-floating signal connection between NC and I/I devices
6. Non-floating user interface with protective separation for 230VAC by means
of interfaces 1 to 4 and 7.
7. Separated 5VDC current supply fed from a 24VDC supply unit.
8. 24VDC current supply for external devices and for machine adaption control
configured according to standard as PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage)
circuit with protective separation.
9. Floating interfaces to machine (not accessible to user)
10. Floating signal interfaces which are directly accessible to user (e.g.
RS-232-C etc.) With these interfaces, it must always be ensured that either
protective separation or two basic insulation elements (each configured for
230VAC) are provided for the supply voltage.
11. 5VDC current supply with basic insulation, fed from a 24VDC supply unit.
Control Power Distribu-
electronics electronics tor box
NCU
EB/PC
Operator panel Machine
MMC
front control panel
S
Terminal
S7-300 I/O device
block
M
EB/PC
EB/PC
EB EB
Machine base
Shielded The cables specified in the individual plans must be used to ensure reliable and
signal lines trouble-free operation of the system.
With digital signal transmission, the shield must always be conductively
connected to the casings at both ends.
Exception:
Installation rules In order to achieve the highest possible noise immunity for the overall system
(control system, power module, machine), the following EMC measures must be
observed:
S The greatest possible clearance must be provided between signal and load
lines.
S If necessary, signal and load lines may cross (wherever possible at an angle
of 90), but they should never be installed closely to each other or run
parallel.
S Only use the cables available from the NC manufacturer as signal cables
from and to the NC and PLC.
S Signal lines should not be installed too closely to strong external magnetic
fields (e.g. motors and transformers).
S The distance (interference injection area) between the following lines must
be as small as possible:
signal line and signal line
signal line and associated equipotential bonding conductor
equipotential bonding conductor and its protective conductor.
!
Important
For further information on interference suppression measures and the
connection of shielded cables, see
References: /EMC/ SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE
EMC Installation Guide
Transporting Backup batteries should only be transported in the original packing material. No
backup batteries special authorization is required for transporting the backup batteries. The
lithium content is approx. 300mg.
Note: According to air freight regulations, the backup battery has Hazardous
Goods Class 9.
Applicable standards: DIN EN 60086(-4)
Warning
! Improper handling of backup batteries can cause the batteries to ignite,
explode or burn.
Rules for handling The following instructions to DIN EN 60086(-4) must always be observed:
backup batteries
Backup batteries
!
Important
Hard disk unit
S Only transport in its original packing material.
S Do not throw it or subject it to other impacts.
S Do not remove it from the supplied mechanical assembly.
S Do not tamper with the springs used!
Function-
impairing gases Table 25-8 Function-impairing gases
Function-impairing If operated in rooms with function-impairing dust, the control system must be
dust operated in a cabinet with heat exchanger or in a cabinet with a suitable
fresh-air supply.
Maximum permitted dust content of air circulated inside cabinet:
Suspended matter 0.2 mg/m3
Deposit 1.5 mg/m2/h
Use The MPI bus can be used to connect the following devices together:
S NCU/CCU
S HHU
S MCP
S HPU
S HT 6.
The MPI connecting cables are available in various lengths.
Network The following basic rules must be observed for network installations:
installations
1. The MPI connection can be continued from one node to the next by con-
necting the MPI connector of the outgoing cable to the MPI connector of the
incoming cable.
2. The bus line must be terminated at both ends. For this purpose, switch on
the terminating resistor in the MPI connector of the first and last node; switch
off the other terminating resistors (see Fig. 25-3).
Note
S Only two installed terminators are permitted.
S With HHU / HPU / HT 6, bus terminating resistors are permanently
installed in the device.
Note
The connection on the NC control is recommended for this purpose.
4. Spur lines (feed cable from the bus segment to the node) should be as short
as possible.
Note
Unused spur lines should be removed.
46 46
O O
N N
55
Notes
AT Advanced Technology
CS Chip Select
GD Global Data
GND Ground
HU Height Units
I/O Input/Output
I/Os Peripherals
NC Numeric Control
OP Operator Panel
PCU PC Unit
PG Programming Unit
WD Watchdog
Notes
/ST7/ SIMATIC
SIMATIC S7 Programmable Logic Controllers
Catalog ST 70
Order No.: E86 060-K4670-A111-A3-7600
Electronic Documentation
User Documentation
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
a) Lists
b) Hardware
c) Software
/FBDN/ IT Solutions
System for NC Data Management and Data
Distribution (DNC NT-2000) (01.02 Edition)
Description of Functions
Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AE50-0BP2
/PFK/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide 1FT5, 1FT6, 1FK6 Motors (12.01 Edition)
AC servo motors for feed and main spindle drives
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AC20-0BP0
/PJFE/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide 1FE1 Built-In Synchronous Motors
Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle Drives (09.01 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AC00-0BP1
/PJLM/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide 1FN1, 1FN3 Linear Motors (11.01 Edition)
ALL General Information about Linear Motors
1FN1 1FN1 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor
1FN3 1FN3 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor
CON Connections
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB70-0BP2
/PJM/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Motors (11.00 Edition)
Three-Phase AC Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA20-0BP5
/PJTM/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Integrated Torque Motors 1FW6 (08.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AD00-0BP0
/PPH/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide 1PH2, 1PH4, 1PH7 Motors (12.01 Edition)
AC Induction Motors for Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AC60-0BP0
/PPM/ SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Hollow-Shaft Motors (10.01 Edition)
for 1PM4 and 1PM6 Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AD03-0BP0
d) Installation and
Start-Up
15 TFT
Communication, 10-156
Function blocks, 10-158 B
Functional description, 10-158 Backlight, 2-47, 3-77, 4-87, 6-116, 7-128, 8-139,
Heat dissipation, 10-193 9-152
Interface, 10-162 Backlight inverter, 3-77, 4-87, 6-116, 7-128,
Mechanical design, 10-176 8-139, 9-152
Mounting, 10-182 Backup battery, 12-222, 12-226, 12-227, 13-248
Operator panel front, 10-156, 10-159 Rules, 25-510
Overview, 10-155 Transporting, 25-509
Spare parts, 10-188 Battery
System features, 10-156 Changing, 12-226
Technical data, 10-192 Clip, 12-227
24V power supply, 12-210, 13-243, 14-256, Plug, 12-227
20-423 Voltage, 12-226
Battery connector, 12-233
Battery replacement, 12-226
A BIOS
Default settings, 12-234
Abbreviations, A-515 Parameters, 12-234
Actuation field, 6-105, 9-144 Settings, 12-226
Aggressive gases, 2-47, 2-51, 4-90, 7-131, 8-142, Settings, changing, 12-237
9-154 Setup, 12-237
Aggressive gases, 5-101, 6-119 BIOS, Setup, 12-237
Alarm, key, 2-34 Board retainer, 12-227, 12-233
Alpha key group, 3-66, 3-67, 5-92, 5-93, 6-104, Boot
6-105, 9-144 Manager, 12-234
Alternating current supply, 25-503 Sequence, 12-237
Aluminum front panel, 1-21 Booting the system, 12-229, 12-234
Anti-rotation element, 12-229 Boundary conditions, electrical, 25-501
Approval, 13-250
Approvals, 11-205, 12-238
Area switchover, 4-82, 5-92, 6-104, 8-134, 9-144
key, 3-66 C
Assembly, panel, 3-74, 5-98, 6-113, 11-203 Cable connector, 3-72
AT module, 12-231 Cable connectors, 4-85, 5-97, 6-109, 7-125,
AT/PCI specification, 12-230 8-136, 9-147
Atmospheric pressure, 25-510 Cable set, 2-54
Attachment, 3-65, 4-81, 5-91, 6-103, 7-121, Cardbus, 12-220
8-133, 9-143
Distributor box, connection, 21-439 Industrial use, designed for, 11-204, 12-219,
Enabling buttons, 21-445 13-247
GD parameters, 21-449 Initialization, 15-320
Handwheel, 21-445 Input key, 12-234, 12-237
Input image, 21-451 Insert nut, 2-41, 2-50
Interface signals, 21-450 Installation, 7-126, 8-137, 9-150, 12-207, 13-246
Keyswitch, 21-445, 21-451 Intake air, 2-51
LED, 21-445 Interconnecting cables, 12-219, 13-247
Magnetic clamp, 21-438 Interface, 10-160, 10-162, 15-314
Operating several, 21-443 Pin assignment, 14-261
Operation, 21-440 Interfaces, 4-83, 5-95, 6-107, 8-135, 9-145,
Output image, 21-452 12-207, 13-241, 14-260, 15-284
Override switch, 21-445 Interference suppression measures, 25-507
PLC module, 21-450 IO USB cable, 12-211, 13-245
Rotary selector settings, 21-451 IO/USB cable K1, 4-85, 7-125, 8-136
Signal chart, 21-454 ISA
Spare parts, 21-461 Module, 12-232
Spare parts, 22-469 Slot, 12-238, 13-250
Technical data, 21-446 ISA/PCI
User interface, 21-450 Adapter, 2-31, 2-41, 2-44, 2-49, 2-50
Handheld unit connection, 15-296 Card, 2-49
Hard disk, 12-219, 13-247, 14-268 ISA/PCI plug-in card, 2-43
Changing, 12-222
Hard disk connection, 12-222
Hard disk drive, 12-209, 12-222, 12-223, 12-238,
13-250
K
Hard disk holder, 12-222 K1, 4-83, 5-95, 6-107, 7-123, 8-135, 9-145
Hard disk module, 13-242 K2, 4-83, 5-95, 6-107, 7-123, 8-135, 9-145
Hardware clock, 12-226 Key cap, 2-52
Hardware reset, 11-199, 12-211, 13-244 Key symbols, 21-438
Heat, 11-203, 12-218, 13-246 Keyboard, 12-210, 12-219, 13-243, 13-247,
Heat dissipation, 1-28, 3-80, 4-90, 5-101, 6-119, 14-264, 20-416
7-131, 8-142, 9-154, 11-205, 12-238, 13-250, Keyboard, controller, 3-77
14-265, 24-497 Keyboard controller, 3-72, 3-77, 3-78, 4-87, 6-116,
Help, key, 2-34 6-117, 7-128, 7-129, 8-139, 9-152
Hinge bolt, 14-266 Keyswitch, 2-52, 2-54, 20-417, 20-418
Hollow rivet, 12-225 Knurled screws, 3-73, 5-97, 6-109, 7-125, 8-136,
Hotkey group, 3-66 9-147
Hotkeys, 5-92
HT 6
Connecting cable, 23-476
PC card interface, 23-477
L
PS/2 keyboard interface, 23-478 LAN, 11-197, 12-210, 13-243
Threaded bushes, 23-475 Laser printer, 3-76, 6-115
User interface, 23-473 LCD, unit, 9-152
Humidity, 11-203, 12-218, 13-246 LCD unit, 3-77, 4-87, 6-116, 8-139
LEDs, 10-173, 20-416, 20-418
Lithium battery, 12-226
Local area network, 11-197, 12-210, 13-243
I Locking, 12-229
I/O devices, 3-69, 4-83, 5-95, 6-107, 7-123, Low current USB, 3-70, 4-83, 5-96, 6-108, 7-124,
8-135, 9-145, 11-204, 12-219, 13-247 8-135, 9-146
I/O USB cable K1, 3-69, 3-72, 4-83, 5-95, 5-97, LPT1, 12-210, 13-243
6-107, 6-109, 7-123, 8-135, 9-145, 9-147 LPT mode, 12-237
IAM, 12-229, 12-234 Interface, 12-207, 12-212, 13-241
Inclined position, 11-203, 12-219, 13-246 Lumotast, 2-54
Individual wiring, 15-301 LVDS, 11-195, 13-241
Industrial, use, 3-69, 4-83, 5-95, 6-107, 7-123, LVDS interface, 12-211, 13-245
8-135, 9-145
W
U Watch dog, 20-415
Universal Serial Bus, 11-197, 13-243 Weight, 3-80, 4-90, 5-101, 6-119, 7-131, 8-142,
Upright mounting, 14-265, 14-269, 14-270 9-154, 11-205, 12-238, 13-250
US layout, 2-34, 2-35 Windows NT, 12-207, 13-241
USB, 11-197, 12-210, 13-243 Windows XP, 12-207
Connection, 3-77, 4-87, 5-100, 6-116, 7-128,
8-139, 9-152
Front interface, 3-66, 3-69, 3-70, 4-82, 4-83,
5-92, 5-95, 5-96, 6-104, 6-107, 6-108,
X
7-122, 7-124, 8-134, 8-135, 9-144, 9-145, X1, 15-286, 16-344
9-146 X10/X11, 15-288, 16-346
Interface, 11-201, 12-213 X11, 5-95, 6-107, 6-108, 9-145, 9-146
Mouse, 6-116, 9-152 X2, 15-286, 16-344
USB connector, 14-264 X3, 15-286, 16-344
USB interface, 4-87, 8-139, 11-195, 12-208, X4, 15-287, 16-345
13-241, 14-263, 14-264, 14-265 XGA, 11-195, 12-207, 13-241
USB signal, 14-264 XT module, 12-231
SINUMERIK
SIROTEC
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
840D/810D 840D/840Di/ Accessories 840D/810D/ 840D/840Di/ 840D/840Di/ 840D/840Di/
810D/ FM-NC 810D 810D 810D
Program. Guide Operators Guide System Overview Configuring Operator Description of Description of
Short Guide ManualTurn (HW) *) Components Functions Functions
Fundamentals *) Short Guide ManualTurn 810D (HW) *) ManualTurn Synchronized
Advanced *) ShopMill 840D ShopMill Actions
Cycles Short Guide ShopMill ShopTurn
Measuring Cycles ShopTurn
ISO Turning/Milling Short Guide ShopTurn
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK
611D 840D/840Di/ 840D/840Di/ 840D/810D 840D/810D 840D/810D
840D/810D 810D 810D
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIMODRIVE SIROTEC
840D 840D/840Di 840D 840D
810D 611D 611D
611D